Panasonic Switch 1200N User Manual
297-8103-903  
Nortel Networks  
BroadBand STP  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch  
User Manual  
SSR3.0 Standard 1.01 September 2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
REGULATORY INFORMATION  
Network Equiipment Building Systems (NEBS)  
This product has been tested and found to comply with the criteria of NEBS level  
1, 2, and 3.  
FCC Part 15 Requirements  
In compliance with FCC Part 15 Rules, the following statement is provided:  
WARNING  
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and  
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may  
cause interference to radio communications. It has been tested and found to  
comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J  
of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are designed to provide reasonable protec-  
tion against such interference when operated in a commercial environment.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interfer-  
ence in which case the user at their expense will be required to take whatever  
measures may be required to correct the interference.  
FCC Part 68 Registration  
Company Notification  
If this product is provided with either a CE-DS1 or an ATM-DS1 interface then the  
following applies:  
Before installing the Centillion 1200N ATM Switch to the telephone network, the  
telephone company must be provided with the following:  
•
•
•
Your telephone number  
The FCC registration number: AY5JPN-32775-XD-N  
The required USOC jack is RJ45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Requirements  
In the event of equipment malfunction, Nortel Networks or an authorized  
distributor of Nortel Networks will perform all repairs. It is the responsibility of  
users requiring service to report the need for service to Nortel Networks or to one  
of their authorized distributors.  
Location of FCC Compliance Labels  
Labels stating the Centillion 1200N ATM Switch FCC registration number and  
compliance with FCC Part 15 and 68 are attached to the Base Chassis. The  
appearance of the labels is as shown below:  
Regulatory Information for Analog Telephone  
The equipment uses the following USOC jacks: RJ45.  
If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will  
notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required.  
If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify the customer  
as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with  
the FCC if you believe it is necessary.  
The telephone company may make changes in its facilities, equipment, operations,  
or procedures that affect the operation of the equipment. If this happens, the  
telephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make necessary  
modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service.  
If trouble is experienced with this equipment, please contact NEC America, Inc.’s  
National Technical And Support Center (NTAC) at 800-538-8166 for repair and/or  
warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
telephone company may request that you remove the equipment form the network  
until the problem is resolved.  
NO REPAIRS CAN BE DONE BY THE CUSTOMER.  
IC CS03 Certification (Canada)  
Certification number: 140 8642  
Load Number of the equipment: N/A  
NOTICE: The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment. The  
certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network  
protective operational and safety requirements. The department does not guarantee  
the equipment will operate to the user’s satisfaction.  
Before installing the equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to be  
connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company. The  
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection. In  
some cases, the companies inside wiring associated with a single line individual  
service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly (telephone  
extension cord). The customer should be aware that compliance with the above  
conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situation.  
Repairs to certified equipment should b made by an authorized Canadian  
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or installations made  
by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give the  
telecommunications company cause to request that the user disconnect the  
equipment.  
Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections  
of the power utility, telephone lines, and internal metallic water pipe system, if  
present, are connected together. This protection may be particularly important in  
rural areas.  
CAUTION: Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves, but  
should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority, or electrician, as  
appropriate.  
CAUTION: The act of monitoring or recording telephone conversations under  
certain circumstances may violate federal or state statutes. Consultation with your  
legal counsel prior to engaging in such practices would be advisable.  
Safety Certifications  
This equipment has been listed by Underwriters Laboratories and found to comply  
with all the applicable requirements of the standard for Information Technology  
rd  
equipment UL 1950 3 edition. This equipment complies with CSA standard  
rd  
C22.2 No 950 3 edition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i  
Precautions on Handling the Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
Precautionary Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1  
Safety Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2  
Operating the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
User Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Equipment Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3  
Handling of Main Unit and Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
PCMCIA Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4  
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1  
Outside View of the ATM Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3  
Centillion 1200NSample System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4  
What is ATM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5  
What is a Server Card? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7  
LAN Emulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8  
ARP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10  
Nomenclature and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Nomenclature of the ATM Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1  
Back View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4  
Description and Function of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Switch/CPU Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5  
Line Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7  
155 Mbps UTP5 Line Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8  
6.3 Mbps-J2 Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9  
DS3 Line Card and E3 Line Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10  
Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11  
Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12  
Slot Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13  
Line Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table of Contents  
Hardware Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Principal Functions of the ATM Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1  
Flow of ATM Cells. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2  
Hardware Configuration and Overview of Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3  
Line Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5  
Interworking Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8  
Server Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9  
Software Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Connection Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1  
Signaling Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3  
Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-4  
ILMI Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4  
PNNI Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5  
Traffic Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Call Admission Control (CAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Usage Parameter Control (UPC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6  
Congestion Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Priority Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7  
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Hardware Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8  
Hardware Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
UNI and NNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1  
Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2  
Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1  
Installation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2  
Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2  
Installation Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3  
Areas Suitable for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5  
Checking the Package Contents and Preparation for Setting . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Packing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6  
Tools and Equipment Necessary for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7  
Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8  
Mounting of Switch on Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9  
Recommended Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9  
Installing the Chassis Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
Installing the Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10  
ATM Switch Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11  
Connecting Communication Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Types of Communication Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12  
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13  
MAT Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
ii  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Inserting PCMCIA Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14  
Turning Power On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
Connecting the Power Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15  
Turning the Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16  
Turning the Power Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Power Source and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17  
Setting System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Operation Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18  
Line Interface Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19  
Basic Configuration and Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Hardware Installation and Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1  
Setting Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2  
Software Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4  
Ongoing Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
Interface, ILMI, and SVC Signaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5  
PVC Setup and Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8  
Setting up LAN Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10  
SVC Tunneling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14  
Maintenance and Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1  
MAT and NMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
MAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2  
Physical Connection of MAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3  
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5  
Communications Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6  
NMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7  
NMS Interface (via ATM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
NMS Interface (via Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8  
Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9  
Backing up Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10  
Cosmetic Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11  
Checking Cables and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11  
Checking with MAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11  
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12  
Modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1  
Moving the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1  
General Precautions on Handling Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3  
Power Unit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
Inserting the Power Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4  
Removing the Power Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6  
Switch/CPU Card Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Inserting the Switch/CPU Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7  
Removing the Switch/CPU Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Line Card Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Inserting a Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9  
Removing a Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11  
Installing the Front Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12  
Removing the Front Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-12  
Installing the Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13  
Inserting the Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13  
Removing the Fan Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14  
Installing the Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15  
Installing the Front Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15  
Removing the Front Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-15  
Upgrading Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16  
Inserting PCMCIA Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-16  
Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18  
Adding Line Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Hardware Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Setting the ATM Switch and MAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Hardware Check of the Additional Line Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Setting System Configuration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25  
Adding Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26  
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26  
Setting the New ATM Switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-26  
Hardware Work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27  
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1  
Error Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1  
Detection by LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2  
Detection by Diagnosis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4  
Troubleshooting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-5  
When ALARM LED is Lighted (Hardware Error). . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5  
Alarm Error Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6  
When RCV/INS is Lighted (Line Error). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10  
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11  
Line Error Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12  
Specifications and Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1  
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1  
Worksheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
iv  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
This page is for your notes.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
vi  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1
Precautions on Handling the Product  
Precautionary Messages  
This document uses the following symbols to alert you to safety issues that you  
should observe to protect yourself and others from physical injury or property  
damage.  
The precautionary messages used in this manual have the following meanings. Be  
sure to understand them before using the product.  
When this sign is ignored and the product is used incorrectly, there is an  
imminent danger that the user will suffer either death or serious injury.  
When this sign is ignored and the product is used incorrectly, there is a pos-  
sibility that the user will suffer either death or a serious injury.  
When this sign is ignored and the product is used incorrectly, there is a pos-  
sibility that the user will suffer an injury or cause property damage.  
The symbols and signals used on the labels supplied with the product have the  
following meanings. Be sure to understand them before using the product.  
Class 1: Uses (safe) laser.  
Keep the power cable disconnected when equipment is not in use.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Safety Measures  
Precautions on Handling the Product  
Safety Measures  
Power Supply  
■
■
■
■
For safety, be sure to use a three-pin outlet for power supply with a grounding  
receptacle. Lack of grounding may cause electric shock.  
To prevent electric shock, do not touch the equipment with wet hands when it  
is connected to a power supply.  
Do not plug the power cable of this equipment into an outlet with excess load.  
Putting excessload on one outlet may cause the outlet to overheat and start a fire.  
Do not place a heater near the power cable, place a heavy object on the power  
cable, or forcefully pull the power cable. Doing so may cause damage to the  
power cable and cause electric shock or fire.  
■
■
Place the equipment indoors.  
Installation  
Place the equipment where the temperature is 41 to 104°F (5 to 40°C) and  
humidity is 10 to 80% (without condensation).  
❑
Condensation happens when moisture in the air attaches to the surface of  
metallic panels, etc., and turn into water drops. Condensation may occur  
inside the equipment when the temperature inside the equipment is low and  
the room temperature is high. Note that condensation may cause the  
equipment to fail.  
■
To prevent electric shock or a failure, do not place the equipment where it is  
susceptible to such liquids as water and oil, steam, or where the humidity is high.  
■
■
Place the equipment where the floor is flat and has adequate strength.  
To prevent a failure or deformation, do not place the equipment where it is  
exposed to direct sunlight or near fire or such heaters as stoves.  
■
■
To prevent a failure, do not place the equipment in a dusty area.  
Donotblocktheventsinthe bottom, back, ortop(rackmount)oftheequipment.  
Blocking the vents will cause the temperature in the equipment to rise and may  
cause a failure or fire.  
1-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Precautions on Handling the Product  
Safety Measures  
■
■
It is dangerous to use the equipment when it is malfunctioning. If you detect an  
irregular condition (irregular noise, irregular odor, or smoke), immediately turn  
off the main power, remove the power plug from the outlet, and call for service.  
Operating the  
Equipment  
To prevent electric shock or a failure, do not pour liquid such as water inside  
the equipment or touch the equipment with a wet hand. If liquid is accidentally  
spilled inside the equipment, turn off the main power, remove the power plug  
from the outlet, and call for service. Even if the equipment appears to be dry,  
if there is liquid left inside the equipment, electric shock or a failure may result.  
■
Do not touch any internal part of the equipment, or modify or disassemble the  
equipment. Electric shock, fire, or a failure may result.  
■
■
The ATM Switch is precision equipment. Keep it away from vibration.  
Do not install the equipment where it is susceptible to vibration. Vibration may  
cause the equipment to fail.  
■
■
To prevent a failure, do not place any foreign objects inside the equipment.  
Static electricitymay cause the equipmentto fail. To prevent damage from static  
electricity, be sure the equipment is adequately grounded.  
■
■
When touching a connector of the equipment, be careful of electrostatic  
damage. Be sure to use an electrostatic prevention kit and wear gloves when  
handling the equipment.  
Thisequipment isnormally usedwith itspower on. Nooneotherthan the person  
in charge of the system should touch the power switch. When power is turned  
off, communications will be severed. In addition, all unsaved data settings will  
be lost.  
Once operation begins, the user need not control the equipment. The user merely  
needs to carefully read the handling precautions in this chapter and provide an  
environment around the equipment so the switch can function properly.  
User  
Responsibilities  
When an error occurs to the equipment during operation, the ALARM LED on the  
front of the equipment will light. In this case, promptly call the system manager.  
■
Protect the equipment from excessive heat or cold. (Do not expose the  
equipment to direct sunlight or place heat-radiating equipment near the switch.)  
Equipment  
Environment  
■
■
■
Ensure adequate ventilation.  
Do not install the equipment where it is constantly humid or it is dusty.  
Do not place a radio, television, or any other equipment that produces strong  
magnetism near the ATM Switch.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Safety Measures  
Precautions on Handling the Product  
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Do not open the equipment or disassemble it.  
Handling of Main  
Unit and Cables  
Do not block ventilation holes or air-cooling fans.  
Do not expose the equipment to strong shock or vibration.  
Do not place heavy objects on the equipment.  
Keep water, chemicals, etc., from coming in contact the equipment.  
Keep foreign objects from entering the inside of the equipment.  
Do not touch the reset switch or cable connections during operation.  
Keep the cables from being at sharp angles.  
The following precautions apply to PCMIA cards (if supplied):  
PCMCIA Cards  
■
■
Do not touch the card's terminal. Poor contact or failure may result.  
Do not bend the card or subject it to external shock. Destruction of saved data  
or a failure may result.  
■
Store the card away from heat, moisture, or direct sunlight. These elements may  
cause the card to deform or fail.  
1-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
The Centillion 1200N is a compact desktop 2.5 Gbps ATM Switch.  
At the core is an input/output buffer switch that realizes a 2.5 Gbps nonblocking  
throughput. The ATM Switch can accommodate up to four lines of 622 Mbps  
interface conforming to the ATM Forum and ITU-T recommendations and up to 16  
lines of 155 Mbps interface.  
XATOM (eXpandable ATM Output Modular Switch), the core of the ATM Switch,  
is equipped with a large-capacity buffer to ensure the smooth flow of multimedia  
traffic and provide a powerful support to multimedia communications.  
The ATM Switch supports both fixed path, or permanent virtual connections  
(PVC), and variable path, or switched virtual connections (SVC), and features such  
functions as ATM cell priority control, congestion control, and traffic monitoring.  
In addition, by using the SNMP protocol, the ATM Switch can interface with a  
network management system (NMS).  
Features  
The ATM Switch is a desktop ATM switch used for such applications as LAN-to-  
LAN connection. The ATM Switch serves as the core of an ATM users' network.  
The features of the ATM Switch are described below.  
■
Realizes 2.5 Gbps throughput  
As the ATM Switch employs an output buffer type ATM switch with a  
random access input-output buffer, it realizes high-capacity switching at a  
high-speed total throughput of 2.5 Gbps of maximum switching capacity (at  
155 Mbps × 16 lines maximum). Consequently, the ATM Switch can be used  
to build a high-speed multimedia network.  
■
Has redundant configuration  
Redundant configuration of power unit ensures high reliability.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Features  
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
■
Accommodates various ATM lines  
The ATM Switch can interface various ATM lines by accommodating both  
optical lines and metallic lines, different throughputs, and different protocols.  
Because the ATM Switch is equipped with interfaces for various ATM lines, it  
can be used for a wide range of multimedia applications depending on the  
need.  
■
Structure of the ATM Switch  
With its compact dimensions, the ATM Switch can be placed on a desktop or  
on a standard 19-inch rack. To facilitate on-site maintenance after the  
operation begins, the ATM Switch is designed to allow service access from  
the front of each unit.  
■
■
Supports various connection functions  
As the ATM Switch supports both fixed connections (PVCs) and switch  
connections (SVCs), it provides various connection formats.  
Connections may be set to one of five levels of control priority  
❑
Total management of network  
Because the ATM Switch is equipped with a network management agent  
function based on SNMP, it can be managed along with such LAN products  
as routers and hubs.  
■
■
Traffic control  
When competition occurs in sending out cells, this traffic control function  
prevents the cell with a higher priority from being delayed or discarded.  
Each connection may be set to one of five levels of control priority.  
Supports PNNI Ver.1.0  
The ATM Switch is the world's first ATM switch to support PNNI Ver.1.0 that  
conforms to the ATM Forum. This ensures that network construction is made  
simple.  
■
■
Provides server function  
By installing a server card (option) in the line card slot, the ATM Switch can  
be used as a LAN emulation server or an ARP server.  
Total management of network  
As the ATM Switch is equipped with a network management agent function  
based on SNMP, it can be managed along with such LAN products as routers  
and hubs.  
■
Interworking with other types of networks  
Interworking between ATM network and other types of networks can be  
realized by installing an interworking line card (Frame Relay card FR-DS1)  
and a Circuit Emulation card (CE-DS1) in the ATM Switch.  
2-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
Outside View of the ATM Switch  
Outside View of the ATM Switch  
Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-2 show the external structure of the ATM Switch. The ATM  
Switch has the following dimensions:  
■
■
■
440 mm (17.3 in.) wide  
410 mm (16.1 in.) deep  
154 mm (6.1 in.) high (including rubber footing)  
Figure 2-1: Front View  
Figure 2-2: Back View (DC Power)  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Centillion 1200NSample System Configuration  
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
Centillion 1200NSample System Configuration  
Explained in Figure 2-3 are LAN-to-LAN connection and ATM-LAN, which are  
principal systems using the ATM Switch.  
Centillion  
Centillion  
Centillion  
Centillion  
Figure 2-3: Sample System Configuration  
LAN-to-LAN Connection  
ATM Switch is used as the backbone network of a router (IP45) or a switching hub  
(ATM Switch 3) for interworking such LANs as Ethernet, Token Ring, and FDDI.  
In this case, the throughout is 2.5 Gbps.  
A router or a switching hub with an ATM interface may be connected directly to  
ATM Switch. Those without an ATM interface may be connected to the ATM  
Switch via DSU.  
ATM-LAN  
By installing ATM-NIC on a PC (Personal Computer)/WS (Work Station) and  
using ATM Switch, the LAN built with Ethernet, etc., can be used as an ATM-  
LAN with maximum throughput of 2.5 Gbps.  
2-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
What is ATM?  
Method of Expansion  
The number of lines accommodated can be increased by connecting a number of  
ATM Switch units. Line interface can be used to connect the ATM Switch units. An  
interface dedicated to connections between units is not necessary. When a number  
of the ATM Switch units are connected to increase the number of lines, the actual  
number of lines accommodated is the total number of lines less the number of lines  
between the units.  
What is ATM?  
ATM, or Asynchronous Transfer Mode, is a communication method that will serve  
as the basis for tomorrow's communication network, B-ISDN.  
In ATM, all data in the network are exchanged in fixed-length, 53-byte blocks  
called "cells." This allows much faster and broader communications compared to  
the conventional STM or packet switching method.  
The communication channels for cells are such virtual connections as VP (Virtual  
Path) and VC (Virtual Channel). These are identified by the VPI (Virtual Path  
Identifier) and VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier) stored in the 5-byte header of each  
cell.  
Figure 2-4 is a conceptual diagram of VP and VC in an ATM network, and the  
format of ATM cells.  
Figure 2-4: Virtual Path (VP) and Virtual Channel (VC)  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
What is ATM?  
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
Figure 2-5 illustrates the ATM cell format.  
Figure 2-5: ATM Cell Format  
2-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
What is a Server Card?  
What is a Server Card?  
The Server Card is a CPU built-in card for realizing seamless connection with  
existing LAN in an ATM network environment.  
The card is mounted on ATM Switches, which serves as the core of an ATM  
network, to provide LANE server, ARP server, and NHRP server functions.  
Following are features of the server card:  
■
Provides server functions conforming to various specifications  
The software that provides the LAN emulation server functions is installed in  
the card with a built-in CPU to facilitate the construction of LAN emulation.  
By installing software with ARP server and NHRP server functions, it is  
possible to eliminate bandwidth waste caused by conventional broadcast  
address solution and improve the capacity of the network as a whole.  
■
■
Hot-Swappable  
The server card can be inserted into or removed from the ATM switching  
system without affecting its switching functions.  
Processor-to-processor communication function  
Reciprocal communication is realized between the CPU in the server card and  
the CPU in the switching system. This function allows the switching system  
to control the server card and also to control in an integrated fashion the  
switching system, along with other network equipment, with an NMS  
(Network Management System).  
■
Allows the installation of several server cards  
A number of server cards can be installed on a single ATM Switch.  
Consequently, this facilitates the scalable expansion of the server according to  
network size and enables the server to be operated in a redundant  
configuration. In addition, this feature makes it possible to distribute the  
traffic that had concentrated in the server with conventional networks.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LAN Emulation  
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
LAN Emulation  
LAN emulation refers to the technology of using the existing infrastructure of a  
LAN and connecting the LAN to an ATM network on a bridge level to emulate the  
connection. The specification of LAN emulation has been standardized by the ATM  
Forum in its “LAN Emulation Over ATM Specification Version 1.0.”  
LAN emulation allows existing LAN terminals to reciprocally communicate with  
ATM terminals and make it possible to construct a virtual LAN that is free of  
physical restraints.  
Figure 2-6 and Figure 2-7 show the LAN emulation protocol stack between an ATM  
terminal and an existing LAN terminal and its frame format when IP protocol is  
used as the network layer.  
Figure 2-6: LAN Emulation Protocol Stack  
Figure 2-7: LAN Emulation Frame Format  
2-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
LAN Emulation  
The server card provides the three server functions below to realize LAN  
emulation.  
■
LES (LAN Emulation Server)  
LES provides the ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) function for solving an  
ATM address from a MAC address. There is one LES for each ELAN  
(Emulated LAN).  
■
LECS (LAN Emulation Configuration Server)  
LECS manages LAN emulation configuration and provides LES addresses. It  
assigns a LEC (LAN Emulation Client; client that is a member of LAN  
emulation) to a certain ELAN. There is one LECS for each management  
domain.  
■
BUS (Broadcast and Unknown Server)  
BUS provides broadcast and multicast functions and solves unknown  
destination addresses. There is one BUS for each ELAN (Emulated LAN).  
Figure 2-8 is a sample system configuration using the ATM Switch series switching  
system and the server card (LAN Emulation Server).  
Centillion  
Centillion  
Centillion  
Centillion  
Figure 2-8: Sample System Configuration  
In the sample system configuration (Figure 2-8), such existing LANs as Ethernet,  
and FDDI are connected to the ATM network by an ATM bridge. Here, the ATM  
bridge and ATM terminal are equivalent to the LAN emulation client.  
The server card is installed on one of the ATM switches in the illustration. A  
number of server cards can be installed on a single ATM Switch.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ARP  
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
ARP  
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is an address conversion protocol used to  
resolve the MAC address (or ATM address) of a terminal from its IP address in a  
subnet. ARP provides IPOA function which conforms to RFC 1577.  
The ARP function provided by the Server Card is to resolve the ATM addresses of  
terminals in ATM-LAN. This function, in particular, is referred to as ATM ARP.  
At least one ARP server is placed in a logical IP subnet (LIS). Having an ARP table  
(IP address-ATM address chart) that is periodically updated, the ARP server  
resolves addresses of terminals in that LIS.  
Shown in Figure 2-9 is the address resolution procedure using an ARP server. (The  
numbers correspond with the procedures that follow.)  
Figure 2-9: Address Resolution Procedure Using an ARP Server  
Each terminal, when connected to ATM-LAN, registers its own IP address and  
ATM address with the ARP server. The ARP server uses the registered  
addresses to prepare an ARP table.  
1.  
2.  
When the transmission terminal has no connection with the destination  
terminal and has not cached the ATM address of the destination terminal, it  
sends to the ARP server an address resolution request with the destination  
terminal's IP address.  
The ARP server, after receiving the address resolution request, checks the ARP  
table to see if there is an entry corresponding to the IP address. If there is, the  
ARP server notifies the terminal of the ATM address corresponding to the  
received IP address.  
3.  
2-10  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
ARP  
The transmission terminal, after receiving the ATM address of the destination  
terminal from the ARP server, uses the ATM address to establish a direct SVC  
connection to the destination terminal. This SVC connection is used until the  
data communication to the destination terminal is completed. When the  
communication is completed, this SVC is released. (The ATM address of the  
destination terminal obtained from the ARP server is cached in the  
transmission terminal and retained for a certain duration.)  
4.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ARP  
What is the Centillion 1200N Switch?  
This page is for your notes.  
2-12  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Nomenclature and Functions  
This chapter describes the names and functions of each part of the ATM Switch.  
■
■
■
■
Nomenclature  
Description and function of components  
Slot number of each package  
Line number  
Nomenclature of the ATM Switch  
Front View  
Power Unit  
The power unit supplies power to the components of the ATM Switch. It draws DC  
-40 to -58V as the power input. The power unit is installed on the top right-hand  
side of the front of the ATM Switch. The power unit may be redundant.  
Switch/CPU Card  
This is the basic component of the ATM Switch. It is capable of switching ATM  
cells at a maximum speed of 2.5 Gbps. It also controls the entire switch. The switch/  
CPU card is installed on the bottom right-hand side of the front of the ATM Switch.  
Front Plate  
The Front Plate is installed in empty line card slots.  
Fan Unit  
The fan units force internal heat outside. The air flows from the right to left.  
RS-232C Port  
This is a 9-pin D-SUB connector used by service personnel to connect a  
Maintenance and Administration Terminal (MAT).  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Nomenclature of the ATM Switch  
Nomenclature and Functions  
Line Cards  
Depending on the type of lines accommodated, line cards are available in variations  
such as:  
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
OC-12c  
OC-3c/STM-4 (single mode)  
OC-3c/STM1 (single mode/ multi-mode/UTP-5/COAX)  
TAXI  
6.3M-J2  
45M-DS3  
34M-E3  
1.5M-DS1  
2M-E1  
FR-DS1  
CE-DS1  
CE-E1  
The line cards provide line interfaces conforming to the ITU-T/ATM Forum. The  
line cards terminate physical and ATM layers. The line cards are installed in the  
line card slots in the front of the ATM Switch.  
LANE server and IPOA ARP server functions can be used by installing a server  
card in the line slot. LANE conforms to ATM Forum and IPOA to RFC1577.  
Figure 3-1: Front View of the ATM Switch (front mask removed)  
3-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nomenclature and Functions  
Nomenclature of the ATM Switch  
RESET Button  
This is used to reset the switch/CPU card.  
ALARM OUT  
An external device for notifying the user of a problem with the ATM Switch (e.g.,  
speaker or alarm lamp) is connected to this connector.  
Power LED  
The POWER LED lights green when power is on and turns off when power is off.  
Ready LED  
The READY LED turns on when the equipment is operating properly and turns off  
when an error occurs. It also flashes during diagnosis.  
Alarm LED  
The ALARM LED lights red when an error occurs in the equipment.  
PCMCIA Card Slot  
This slot is used to install an ATA (flash disk) card for storing software or system  
configuration data or a LAN card (optional) for connecting the hardware to  
Ethernet.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nomenclature of the ATM Switch  
Nomenclature and Functions  
Back View  
Power Switch  
This switch is used to turn the ATM Switch on and off.  
DC Power Connector  
This connector is used to connect the power cable.  
Power Unit Fastening Screw  
This screw is used to fasten the power unit to the main unit and ground the ground  
wire inside the main unit for safety.  
Figure 3-2: Back View of the ATM Switch  
3-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Nomenclature and Functions  
Description and Function of Components  
Description and Function of Components  
Switch/CPU Card  
Figure 3-3: Front View of the Switch/CPU Card  
Power/Ready/Alarm Indicator Lights  
These lamps indicate the status of the switch/CPU card.  
POWER  
READY  
Lighted  
Off  
Power on  
Power off  
Lighted  
Flashing  
Off  
Operating properly  
Undergoing diagnosis  
Error occurred  
Error occurred  
Operating properly  
ALARM  
Lighted  
Off  
RESET Button  
This button is used to reset the switch/CPU card.  
RS-232C Connector  
This is a 9-pin D-SUB connector used by service personnel to connect a  
Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT).  
ALARM Out  
This connector is used to connect an external device for notifying the occurrence  
of an irregular condition in the hardware (e.g., speaker or alarm notification lamp).  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Description and Function of Components  
PCMCIA Card Slot  
Nomenclature and Functions  
This slot is used to install a PCMCIA (ATA, LAN) card.  
■
■
622 Mbps single mode line card  
155 Mbps single mode (long) line card  
Figure 3-4: Front View of 622 Mbps Single Mode and 155 Mbps Single  
Mode (Long) Line Card  
RCV/INS  
Available for each line, these lamps indicate the status of that particular line.  
RCV (red)  
Off  
INS (green)  
Lighted  
Off  
Status  
Line status normal  
Line error (reception error)  
Line error (transmission error)  
Hardware error  
Lighted  
Off  
Flashing  
Off  
Off  
Rx/Tx  
These codes indicate the reception side and transmission side of the SC connectors.  
Rx  
Tx  
Reception side connector  
Transmission side connector  
3-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Nomenclature and Functions  
Description and Function of Components  
■
■
■
155 Mbps Multi-mode Line Card  
Line Cards  
155 Mbps Single Mode (short) Line Card  
100 Mbps TAXI Line Card  
Figure 3-5: Front View of 155 Mbps Multi-Mode, 155 Mbps Single Mode  
(Short), and 100 Mbps TAXI Line Card  
RCV/INS  
Available for each line, these lamps indicate the status of that particular line.  
RCV (red)  
Off  
INS (green)  
Lighted  
Off  
Status  
Line status normal  
Line error (reception error)  
Line error (transmission error)  
Hardware error  
Lighted  
Off  
Flashing  
Off  
Off  
Rx/Tx  
These codes indicate the reception side and transmission side of the SC connectors.  
Rx  
Tx  
Reception side connector  
Transmission side connector  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Description and Function of Components  
Nomenclature and Functions  
155 Mbps UTP5  
Line Card  
Figure 3-6: Front View of 155 Mbps UTP5 Line Card  
RCV/INS  
Available for each line, these lamps indicate the status of that particular line.  
RCV (red)  
Off  
INS (green)  
Lighted  
Off  
Status  
Line status normal  
Line error (reception error)  
Line error (transmission error)  
Hardware error  
Lighted  
Off  
Flashing  
Off  
Off  
3-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Nomenclature and Functions  
Description and Function of Components  
6.3 Mbps-J2 Line  
Card  
Figure 3-7: Front View of 6.3 Mbps-J2 Line Card  
RCV/INS  
Available for each line, these lamps indicate the status of that particular line.  
RCV (red)  
Off  
INS (green)  
Lighted  
Off  
Status  
Line status normal  
Line error (reception error)  
Line error (transmission error)  
Hardware error  
Lighted  
Off  
Flashing  
Off  
Off  
Rx/Tx  
These codes indicate the reception side and transmission side of the BNC  
connectors.  
Rx  
Tx  
Reception side connector  
Transmission side connector  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Description and Function of Components  
Nomenclature and Functions  
DS3 Line Card  
and E3 Line Card  
Figure 3-8: Front View of DS3 and E3 Line Card  
RCV/INS  
Available for each line, these lamps indicate the status of that particular line.  
RCV (red)  
Off  
INS (green)  
Lighted  
Off  
Status  
Line status normal  
Line error (reception error)  
Line error (transmission error)  
Hardware error  
Lighted  
Off  
Flashing  
Off  
Off  
Rx/Tx  
These codes indicate the reception side and transmission side of the BNC  
connectors.  
Rx  
Tx  
Reception side connector  
Transmission side connector  
3-10  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Nomenclature and Functions  
Description and Function of Components  
Power Unit  
Figure 3-9: Outside View of Power Unit  
The power unit indicates an alarm and stops output under the following conditions:  
■
When excessive load is imposed on the output side and the protective function  
of the power unit lowers the voltage.  
■
■
When voltage of higher than the rating is output due to an error in the power unit.  
When the temperature rises abnormally inside the power unit.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Description and Function of Components  
Nomenclature and Functions  
Fan Unit  
Figure 3-10: Outside View of Fan Unit  
Finger Guard  
Protects users from injury.  
Fastening Screws  
These screws are used to fasten the fan unit to the shell.  
3-12  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Nomenclature and Functions  
Slot Numbers  
Slot Numbers  
Slot numbers for each package of the ATM Switch are shown in Figure 3-11:  
Figure 3-11: Slot Numbers  
Power Unit Slot  
When viewed from the front of the ATM Switch, slot #0 is to the left and slot #1 is  
to the right.  
Line Card Slot  
When viewed from the front of the ATM Switch, slot #0 - 3 are from bottom to top.  
PCMCIA Card Slot  
When viewed from the front of the ATM Switch, slot #0 is at bottom and slot #1 is  
at top. In principle, slot #0 is for the ATA card and slot #1 is for the LAN card.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Line Numbers  
Nomenclature and Functions  
Line Numbers  
Line numbers of the ATM Switch are as shown in Figure 3-12.  
Figure 3-12: Line Numbers  
Each line number of the ATM Switch is composed of two digits. The left-most digit  
indicates the line slot number and the last digit the position number.  
Regardless of how many line ports are on a line card, the position numbers are, from  
the left, #0, #1, #2, and #3.  
3-14  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Hardware Specifications  
This section describes overview of the flow of ATM cell and each functional block  
of the ATM Switch.  
Principal Functions of the ATM Switch  
„
„
Accommodates various ATM lines  
The ATM Switch can interface various ATM lines by accommodating both  
optical lines and metallic lines, different throughputs, and different protocols.  
The ATM Switch is equipped with interfaces for various ATM lines.  
Cell Switching  
The ATM Switch identifies the destination ATM line using the cell header  
information in the ATM cell sent over the ATM line, then sends the cell. The  
ATM Switch has a switching capacity of 4 lines at 622 Mbps or, in throughput,  
2.5 Gbps.  
„
Fixed path setting  
The path is normally set according to the connection information stored in the  
PCMCIA ATA card. Path setting is changed by changing the connection  
information from an external MAT. When the ATM Switch is reset, the path is  
set according to the PVC connection information stored in the PCMCIA card  
or the PVC connection information downloaded from an external source.  
„
„
Variable path setting  
The ATM Switch has a network address - line table to realize this function.  
This table is automatically generated by ILMI function (dynamic routing table)  
and/or set from a MAT (static routing table).  
Traffic control  
When competition occurs in sending out cells, this traffic control function  
prevents the cell with a higher priority from being delayed or discarded.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Flow of ATM Cells  
Hardware Specifications  
„
Network management system interface  
This unit exchanges maintenance information with the network management  
system.  
Flow of ATM Cells  
The flow of ATM cells is as follows:  
Cells sent over lines are received by the line cards.  
1.  
2.  
The line cards generate switching information from the VPI, VCI, and PT in  
the cell header.  
The switch/CPU card outputs cells to the line cards corresponding to the  
destination lines.  
3.  
A line card that receives a cell converts the VPI, VCI, and PT in the cell header.  
Cells are sent to the destination lines.  
4.  
5.  
As an ATM switch, the switch/CPU card time-division multiplexes ATM cells from  
the four line cards, uses AFs (address filters) to sort the input ATM cells according  
to the destinations in their headers, then sends the ATM cells to the line cards. In  
addition, the switch/CPU card is equipped with a CPU and has an interface with  
MAT or NMS to perform hardware control, path connection control, and protocol  
control.  
Figure 4-1: ATM Switch  
4-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Specifications  
Hardware Configuration and Overview of Functions  
Hardware Configuration and Overview of Functions  
The ATM switch accommodates up to 16 ATM lines per unit and performs  
nonblock switching of fixed-length data (53 bytes) called ATM cells.  
Shown below are the functional blocks that comprise the ATM Switch.  
Figure 4-2: Functional Block Diagram  
The principal processes performed in each functional block in the switch/CPU card  
are described below.  
GWPAD  
■
controls the assembly and disassembly of cells according to AAL5  
when the CPU communicates with the NMS (Network Management System)  
via ATM line or when switching cells according to SVC.  
ASW  
■
■
is a functional block composed of ATOMSW (output buffer type switch).  
This functional block controls cell switching.  
CLK  
generates system clock.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Configuration and Overview of Functions  
Hardware Specifications  
CPU  
■
is a card whose software operates to control the entire ATM Switch, and  
is composed of a 64-bit RISC processor, main memory, flash memory, etc.  
Hardware Block  
Description of Functions  
■
Cell switching control (point-to-point connection,  
point-to-multipoint connection)  
Switch/  
CPU card  
ASW  
■
■
■
Five-class cell delay priority control  
Cell alignment  
Back Pressure (BP) sampling control/generation  
control/multiplexing control  
■
■
System clock generation and distribution  
CLK  
Self-running mode (self-running precision: +/- 4.6  
ppm)  
■
Slave mode (pull-in range: +/- 9.2 ppm, only lines  
00 - 13 can be enslaved)  
■
■
Cell assembly/disassembly control (transmission/  
reception 512 connection)  
GWPAD  
CPU  
DMA transfer control (burst access)  
■
■
■
■
■
■
RISC processor installed  
Main memory 32 Mbytes  
Flash memory (PCMCIA card)  
LAN interface control (Ethernet) (PCMCIA card)  
SIO interface (RS-232C)  
Clock  
4-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Specifications  
Hardware Configuration and Overview of Functions  
A line card is composed of a line interface unit and a line buffer.  
Line Cards  
Basically, the line interface unit physically terminates the lines. The line interface  
unit takes ATM cells from the ATM line signals and sends the cells to the line buffer.  
In addition, the line interface unit inserts the ATM cells from the line buffer into the  
ATM line signals and sends the cells to the opposing hardware. In addition, the line  
interface unit multiplexes and demultiplexes the ATM cells from a number of lines.  
The principal functions performed by the line interface unit are as follows:  
■
Conversion of electric signals and optical signals and detection of optical  
reception signal disconnection.  
■
■
■
Serial/parallel conversion.  
Encode/decode or termination of each line frame.  
Cell alignment and clock change (adjusts cell speed to line speed).  
The line buffer converts into address number the data housed in the header of the  
ATM cell received from the line interface unit and sends the cell to the ATM switch.  
At the same time, the line buffer unit is equipped with an input buffer (IXB) that  
stores ATM cells according to the BP (back pressure) from the switch engine.  
Furthermore, the line buffer converts the address number in the header of the ATM  
cell received from the ATM switch into data used by the opposing hardware and  
sends the cell to the line terminating block. The line buffer is also equipped with an  
output buffer (OXB) that stores ATM cells that are input in excess of the line speed.  
The principal functions performed by the line buffer are as follows:  
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Valid VP bit count: 14 bits  
Input-output buffers, each 32,000 cells in size  
Congestion control (BP and EFCI functions)  
Priority control (QoS 5 class, loss 2 class)  
UPC control (GCRA)  
OAM control (loop-back, F4/F5 error control)  
Shaping (PCR & SCR guarantee type)  
Frame discard (EPD)  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Configuration and Overview of Functions  
Types of Line Cards  
Hardware Specifications  
The line cards are available in several types, to suit the various lines accommodated.  
While the line cards differ in a number of ways, such as the shape of connectors,  
they basically function in the same way.  
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
OC-12c  
OC-3c/STM-4 (single mode)  
OC-3c/STM1 (single mode/ multi-mode/UTP-5/COAX)  
TAXI  
6.3M-J2  
45M-DS3  
34M-E3  
1.5M-DS1  
2M-E1  
FR-DS1  
CE-DS1  
CE-E1  
4-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Specifications  
Hardware Configuration and Overview of Functions  
Functional Blocks  
A functional description of each functional block in the line card is shown in the  
following table.  
Hardware  
Block  
Description of Functions  
■
Conversion of physical media  
(e.g., E/O conversion, O/E conversion)  
Line card  
PHY  
■
■
■
■
■
■
Reception clock recovery  
Transmission clock generation  
Frame termination  
Cell alignment  
Speed conversion  
Line loop-back control  
■
■
Cell multiplexing/demultiplexing of multiple PHY  
Cell loop-back control  
MUX  
ALT  
■
SSO (Switch Specific Overhead) generation  
(reception side)  
■
■
■
■
Cell header conversion (transmission side)  
Policing control  
Flow monitor (e.g., passing cell count)  
OAM function (Fault Management)  
■
■
■
■
■
■
Cell storage buffer (32K cell buffer)  
QoS five-class (CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, ABR, UBR)  
Two-class cell loss priority control  
EPD (Early Packet Discard)  
IXB  
BP (Back Pressure) reception control  
Congestion notification control  
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Cell storage buffer (32K cell buffer)  
QoS five-class (CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, ABR, UBR)  
BP (Back Pressure) generation control  
Broadcast cell control  
OXB  
ABR (ER control, binary mode)  
Congestion notification control  
Shaping  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Configuration and Overview of Functions  
Hardware Specifications  
The FR card and the CE card installed in the ATM Switch are equipped with a  
function for interworking between ATM network and other types of networks.  
Interworking  
Cards  
The CE cards provide structured service and unstructured service in circuit  
emulation. There are four types of CE cards:  
■
■
■
■
CE-DS1  
CE-J2  
CE-DS3  
CE-E1  
With CE-DS1, 8-bit channels are stored in DS1 frames and the DS1 frames can be  
switched over to ATM cells depending on the type of service provided.  
The frame format of CE-DS1 in shown in Figure 4-3.  
Figure 4-3: CE-DS1 Frame Format  
4-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Hardware Specifications  
Hardware Configuration and Overview of Functions  
The CE-DS1 card conforms to the following recommendations and specifications:  
■
ITU-T  
G356, G362, G702, G703, G704, G709, G823, G824  
T1.102, T1.107A, T1.403, T1.408, T1.630, T1.627  
TR-NWT-000170  
■
■
■
ANSI  
Bellcore  
ATM Forum  
Circuit Emulation Service Interoperability Spec,  
UNI Spec 3.1  
A server card is composed of a server unit and an FR buffer.  
Server Cards  
The server unit is a basic component of the Server Card. Featuring a CPU with a  
R4650 processor and flash memory, the server unit provides server functions and  
controls the Server Card.  
The FR buffer realizes a communication function between the Server Card's CPU  
and the switching system's CPU. Inter-processor communication is realized by  
FRCTL-LSI, via the inter-processor message communication table on the  
SDRAM.  
Shown below are the specifications of the server card:  
CPU R4650  
CLK 100MHz  
Cache Memory 8KB+8KB  
DRAM 16MB  
Flash Memory (ROM) 2MB  
Flash Memory (FILE) 8MB  
PCI BUS 33MHz  
Interface  
RS232C  
Ethernet 10BaseT  
Redundancy configuration Redundant  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Configuration and Overview of Functions  
Hardware Specifications  
This page is for your notes.  
4-10  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Software Specifications  
This section briefly describes the functions of the ATM Switch.  
As a core entity in an ATM network, the ATM Switch provides a variety of  
functions to sustain and operate the network most efficiently and at high quality.  
Here, the following functions of the ATM Switch are explained.  
■
■
■
■
■
Connection Management  
Signaling Control  
Routing  
Traffic Management  
Hardware Management  
Connection Management  
The ATM Switch supports both fixed connections (PVCs) and variable connections  
(SVCs).  
PVC is a fixed connection that is manually established on the ATM Switch.  
Normally, the connection is established according to the connection information  
stored in the PCMCIA ATA card. The connection establishment can be changed by  
changing the connection information from an external MAT. When the ATM  
Switch is reset, the connection is established according to the PVC connection  
information stored in the PCMCIA ATA card or PVC connection information  
downloaded from an external source.  
SVC is a variable connection that is prepared by a protocol called signaling that  
establishes and releases SVCs. The ATM Switch maintains a network address - line  
correspondence table to realize the best suited SVC routing for the given network  
condition. This table is generated and changed manually (static routing table), or  
automatically generated by the ILMI function and the PNNI function (dynamic  
routing table).  
Both types of connection can be set to either point-to-point connection or point-to-  
multipoint connection.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Connection Management  
Software Specifications  
The number of connections per system is as follows:  
Point-to-point (PVC): 8,000 connections  
Point-to-multipoint (PVC): 1,000 connections  
Point-to-point (SVC): 4,000 connections  
Point-to-multipoint (SVC): 1,000 end points  
■
■
■
■
The ATM Switch also supports two connections, Soft PVC and tunneling, that take  
advantage of the characteristics of PVC and SVC mentioned above.  
Soft PVC is a PVPC (Permanent Virtual Path Connection) or a PVCC (Permanent  
Virtual Circuit Connection) that is established by SVC procedure over several  
switches.  
The ATM Switch allows the user to register up to 64 Soft PVCs. To use the Soft  
PVC service, the remote side switch must be a NETNEX ATM Switch.  
Tunneling is a connection that is established over a PVP (Permanent Virtual Path)  
network (e.g., existing public network that does not support SVC).  
A VP (Virtual Path) is established in a physical link that connects the switches in a  
PVP network, and the VP is used as a tunneling path. The switch (edge switch) that  
is adjacent to the PVP network establishes PVCs in the tunneling path and sends  
SVC setup messages. The ATM Switch allows the user to register up to 64 tunneling  
paths. Figure 5-1 is a conceptual diagram of the connections supported by the ATM  
Switch.  
Figure 5-1: The ATM Switch Connections  
Connections are established by inputting commands from a MAT connected to the  
ATM Switch. The information on the established connection can be read by a  
command from the MAT or sending a GET request from an NMS. (For details on  
the commands, refer to the ATM Command Manual.)  
5-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Software Specifications  
Signaling Control  
Signaling Control  
SVC connections provided by the ATM Switch are prepared by a protocol called  
signaling that establishes and releases SVCs.  
The signaling protocol is used by the calling terminal to notify the network of the  
destination of the established SVC, communication band, and traffic quality.  
The signaling protocols supported by the ATM Switch are as follows:  
■
■
ITU-T recommendation draft Q.2931 at the May 1993 meeting of the ITU-T  
Study Group II.  
ATM Forum UNI 3.0 based on Q.SAAL1 (SSCOP) of ITU-T Study Group 11  
Document DT/11/3-28.  
■
■
ATM Forum UNI 3.1  
ATM Forum UNI 4.0  
The addresses that can be used for signaling are:  
■
■
■
Address format E.164.  
NSAP incorporated ATM private network address defined by ATM Forum.  
Besides UNI, the ATM Switch also supports routing function and signaling  
function conforming to ATM Forum PNNI 1.0. Consequently, a signaling  
request may be routed through a network composed of more than one switch.  
■
Control layer AAL5 (ATM Adaptation Layer 5) called "C plane" is used to  
convey the signaling request.  
Figure 5-2 shows the protocol stack of the C plane.  
Figure 5-2: Protocol Stack of C plane  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Routing  
Software Specifications  
Routing  
The signaling for establishing SVC connections is transferred by referring to the  
routing table maintained by each switch in the network.  
There are two types of routing table: static routing table and dynamic routing table.  
the ATM Switch provides the ILMI (Integrated Local Management Interface) and  
PNNI (Private Network-Network Interface) functions for preparing and revising  
the dynamic routing tables. Static routing tables can also be revised manually.  
ILMI is a function for learning the configuration data of neighboring equipment  
when an end system is connected to a switch or when a switch is connected to  
another switch.  
ILMI Functions  
The ILMI function includes a switch-terminal address registration function. This  
function is triggered by a trap. The switch adds the inherent address of each  
terminal to its network prefix and registers the result as the ATM address of each  
terminal.  
A switch prepares dynamic routing tables by this address registration function.  
Figure 5-3 illustrates the procedure of ILMI address registration.  
Figure 5-3: ILMI Address Registration  
5-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Software Specifications  
Routing  
PNNI is a function whereby switches in a network exchange information to  
automatically prepare a dynamic routing table and route cells by referring to that  
table. Such information is exchanged periodically or whenever there is a change.  
The information is used by each switch to prepare a dynamic routing table  
between PNNIs that reflects network status in a timely fashion.  
PNNI Functions  
Figure 5-4 illustrates the procedure by which the PNNI function prepares a  
dynamic routing table.  
Centillion  
Centillion  
Figure 5-4: Generating Dynamic Routing Table by PNNI Function  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Traffic Management  
Software Specifications  
Traffic Management  
The ATM Switch provides the following traffic management functions.  
■
Call Admission Control  
Usage Parameter Control  
Congestion Control  
Priority Control  
Shaping  
■
■
■
■
■
Monitoring  
Figure 5-5 shows how traffic is controlled and how each function fits into the  
process in the ATM Switch.  
Figure 5-5: Traffic Management  
When a SVC establishment request signaling is received from the originating  
terminal, CAC, or Call Admission Control, determines whether to accept that  
request. CAC checks the current usage of the network to determine whether the  
communication band and traffic quality requested by that SVC can be satisfied,  
then decides whether to establish the connection.  
Call Admission  
Control (CAC)  
UPC, or Usage Parameter Control, monitors whether the traffic of the user’s  
communication in progress has exceeded the band declared in the request for SVC  
establishment. This control is necessary to prevent deterioration to the quality of  
the communications of the user and other users in the network.  
Usage Parameter  
Control (UPC)  
The ATM Switch employs a six-stage parameter control using the dual leaky  
bucket method.  
5-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Software Specifications  
Traffic Management  
In the ATM Switch, congestion is controlled by applying a back pressure in the  
direction of line output unit » switch » line input unit and restricting the number of  
incoming cells. The ATM Switch also supports congestion control using Explicit  
Forward Congestion Indicator (EFCI) and RM (Resource Management) cell.  
Congestion  
Control  
Furthermore, the ATM Switch controls congestion from ABR/UBR class traffic  
by using EPD (Early Packet Discard), or a function that discards cells in frame  
increments when the input buffer is congested.  
The ATM Switch performs the five classes of controls below on traffic delay:  
Priority Control  
■
■
■
■
■
CBR (Constant Bit Rate service)  
rt-VBR (Variable Bit Rate service (real time))  
nrt-VBR (Variable Bit Rate service (non real time))  
ABR (Available Bit Rate service)  
UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate service)  
In this list, the higher the control, the better the delay characteristics. Priority is  
given to CBR and rt-VBR traffic as they are transmitted ahead of other classes of  
traffic.  
These delay priorities can be selected for each connection when establishing the  
connection.  
In the switch, a cell delay of no less than 40 µsec occurs depending on the degree  
of passing cell congestion and the degree of priority.  
The ATM Switch performs two classes of controls on cell loss. Cell loss priority  
control is performed in cell increments based on the CLP bit value in the header of  
each cell. The definition of CLP bit value is as follows:  
■
■
CLP bit "0" (high priority)  
CLP bit "1" (low priority)  
In the ATM Switch, to ensure traffic quality, every line card shares one input  
buffer (32,000 cell capacity) and one output buffer (32,000 cell capacity).  
Shaping is a function that schedules cell transfer so it complies with the  
communication rate and traffic parameters declared by each connection. This  
function ensures that even bursty data are transferred at a consistent rate without  
being discarded and that the network bands are used efficiently.  
Shaping  
The ATM Switch allows one of eight stages of shaping to be set for each port.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Hardware Management  
Software Specifications  
Monitoring is a function that reads the cell counter of the hardware. It checks the  
total number of cells exchanged in the ATM Switch, the number of error cells, and  
the number of discarded cells, etc.  
Monitoring  
When an overflow occurs (at 4 billion+ cells), the cell counter stops counting  
cells.  
NOTE  
The information on the ATM Switch traffic and performance can be checked for  
each line, connection, or line physical level by inputting the command  
DISPLAY traffic from a MAT. For details on the DISPLAY traffic  
command, refer to the appropriate Command Manual.  
Hardware Management  
The hardware management unit controls the following:  
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Static hardware configuration  
Dynamic hardware configuration (operation status management)  
Hardware revision  
Software revision  
Own IP address  
NMS address  
Connection-related parameter control (e.g., the number of VPIs of the line)  
These pieces of information are stored in a database called a Management  
Information Base (MIB). Information stored in the MIB can be set and read from  
a MAT.  
The NMS uses Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to access the MIB  
of each device in the network and centrally manage faults and configuration data  
of the devices.  
5-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6
Hardware Interface  
This chapter describes the line interfaces that the ATM Switch supports.  
UNI and NNI  
As illustrated in Figure 6-1, there are two types of interfaces in an ATM network.  
One is the User Network Interface (UNI) that connects an end system (a router, for  
example) to an ATM switch. The other is the Network Node Interface (NNI) that  
connects two ATM switches. These interfaces are further classified into public  
network interface and private network interface, depending on the type of the  
network they are connected to.  
The ATM Switch provides various line cards to accommodate these interfaces.  
Centillion  
Centillion  
Centillion  
Centillion  
Figure 6-1: ATM Network Interface  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Line Interface  
Hardware Interface  
Line Interface  
Provided below is an outline of the line interface specifications of the ATM Switch:  
SONET OC-12/SDH STM-4 Frame Format  
■
■
■
■
■
■
For public network UNI and private network UNI/NNI  
Physical layer: SONET PMD  
Optical fiber (single mode)  
Line coding: NRZ  
Data rate/line rate: 622.08 Mbps  
Cell rate: 622.08 × 1040/1080 = 599.04 Mbps  
S T M -4 fram e  
VC-4-4C  
1080Bytes  
12Bytes  
12Bytes  
A2  
12Bytes  
1044Bytes  
4Bytes  
8Bytes  
A1  
B1  
A1  
A1  
A2  
E1  
D 2  
H 2  
K1  
D 5  
D 8  
D 11  
Z2  
A2  
C 1  
F1  
C 1  
C 1  
C 1  
H 3  
C 1* C 1*  
D 1  
H 1  
B2  
D 3  
H 3  
K2  
4Bytes  
1044Bytes  
H 1*  
B2  
H 1*  
B2  
H 2*  
H 2*  
H 3  
H 3  
H 3  
H 3  
J1  
B3  
C 2  
D 4  
D 7  
D 10  
Z1  
D 6  
D 9  
D 12  
E2  
G 1  
F2  
H 4  
Z3  
Z4  
Z6  
FIXED  
STU FF  
Z1  
Z1  
Z2  
Z2  
VC-4-4C PAYLOAD  
H 1* :1 001 S S11 (S S bit,inclu ding H 1, is set 1 /O O C 1 2 ="00 " S T M -4 = "1 0")  
H 2* :11111111  
C 1* :U nassigned b yte(1 01 01 01 0= N T T sp ecification (ST M -4 ) fix ed )  
:U nassign ed by te(A L L "0") < O C 1 2 sp ecification fix ed >  
A fter 2 by tes of E 1,E 2,D 1-D 1 2,an d Z 1  
Z 2# 1,Z 2 # 2,Z 2 #4 -Z 2 # 12 ,J1,F 2,Z 3 -Z 5:A L L "1"  
F IX E D ST U F F :A L L "1 "  
Figure 6-2: SONET OC-12/SDH STM-4 Frame Format  
6-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Hardware Interface  
Line Interface  
SONET OC3/SDH STM-1 Frame Format  
■
■
■
■
■
■
For public network UNI and private network UNI/NNI  
Physical layer: SONET PMD  
Optical fiber (multi mode/single mode), UTP5  
Line coding: NRZ  
Data rate/line rate: 155.52 Mbps  
Cell rate: 155.52 × 260/270 = 149.76 Mbps  
270 B ytes  
A 1 A 1 A 1 A 2 A 2 A 2 C 1 C 1 C 1  
B 1  
D 1  
E1  
F1  
D 2  
D 3  
J1  
Path Trace  
A U -4 pointer  
B 3  
C 2  
G 1  
F2  
H 4  
Z3  
Z4  
Z5  
B IP-8  
9
B ytes  
B 2 B 2 B 2 K 1  
K 2  
D 6  
Path Identifier  
Error R eport  
U ser C hannel  
H eader C ell Indicator  
R eserved  
D 4  
D 7  
D 5  
D 8  
D 9  
D 10  
D 11  
D 12  
Z1 Z1 Z1 Z2 Z2 Z2 E2  
R eserved  
R eserved  
A 1  
A 1,A 2  
:Fram e alignm ent  
:B its active in U N I  
B 1  
B 2  
C 1  
:B IP-8  
:B IP-24  
:STM fram e identification  
D 1-D 12 :D ata com m unication channel  
E1,E2  
F1  
:O rder w ire  
:U ser channel  
K 1  
:C hange-over control  
:C hange-over control,A IS/R D I  
:R eserved  
K 2  
Z1  
Z2  
:FEB E  
Figure 6-3: SONET OC-3/SDH STM-1 Frame Format  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Interface  
Hardware Interface  
100M TAXI Frame Format  
■
■
■
■
■
■
For private network UNI/NNI  
Physical layer: FDDI PMD  
Optical fiber: multi mode  
Line coding: 4B/5B  
Data rate: 100 Mbps  
Line rate: 125 Mbaud  
In 100M TAXI, there is no frame for existing STM. A field is established for  
aligning the cells.  
NOTE  
Figure 6-4: 100M TAXI Frame Format  
6-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Interface  
Line Interface  
6.3M-J2 Frame Format  
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
For public network UNI  
Physical layer: TTC standard JT-G703-a  
Coaxial cable  
Line coding: NRZ  
Data rate/line rate: 6.312 Mbps  
Cell rate: 6.144 Mbps  
Cell alignment: HEC is used  
Figure 6-5: Secondary Speed Interface (6.3M) Frame Format  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Interface  
Hardware Interface  
DS3 Frame Format  
■
■
For public network UNI and private network UNI/NNI  
Physical layer:  
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
ITU-T G703  
G804  
I432  
ANSI T1.102-1933  
T1.107a-1990  
T1.404-1994  
T1.646-1995  
Bellcore TR-NWT-001112  
TR-NWT-000499  
■
■
■
■
Coaxial cable  
Line coding: B3ZS  
Data rate/line rate: 44.736 Mbps  
Cell rate: 44.21 Mbps (Direct Mapping), 40.70 Mbps (PLCP)  
Figure 6-6 and Figure 6-7 illustrate DS3 frame format and DS3 PLACP frame  
format.  
6-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Interface  
Line Interface  
16-bit 84-bit  
680-bit  
INFO.PYLD. F0  
X
X
P
P
INFO.PYLD. F1 INFO.PYLD.  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
F0  
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
INFO.PYLD.  
INFO.PYLD.  
INFO.PYLD.  
INFO.PYLD.  
INFO.PYLD.  
INFO.PYLD.  
INFO.PYLD.  
INFO.PYLD. F1 INFO.PYLD.  
INFO.PYLD. F1 INFO.PYLD.  
INFO.PYLD. F1 INFO.PYLD.  
INFO.PYLD. F0  
INFO.PYLD. F0  
INFO.PYLD. F0  
INFO.PYLD. F0  
INFO.PYLD. F0  
INFO.PYLD. F0  
Subfram e  
M 0INFO.PYLD. F1 INFO.PYLD.  
M 1INFO.PYLD. F1 INFO.PYLD.  
M 0 INFO.PYLD. F1 INFO.PYLD.  
7 Subfram e, each with 680 bits = 1 M -Fram e with 4760 bytes  
INFO.PYLD.(Inform ation Payload)= 4704 bytes available for the PLCP  
Each INFO .PYLD.block = 84 bits  
The sym bol . . . represents an INFO .PYLD .block  
...  
X, Fn (where n = 1001), C, P, M n (where n = 010) = D S3 O verhead Bit  
Figure 6-6: DS3 Frame Format  
F ram ing  
P L C P P ayload  
P L C P  
sec  
P O I  
P O H  
0
µ
A 1  
A 2  
A 2  
A 2  
A 2  
A 2  
A 2  
A 2  
A 2  
A 2  
A 2  
A 2  
A 2  
P 11  
P 10  
P 9  
P 8  
P 7  
P 6  
P 5  
P 4  
P 3  
P 2  
P 1  
P 0  
Z 6  
Z 5  
Z 4  
Z 3  
Z 2  
Z 1  
X
B 1  
G 1  
X
F irst AT M C ell  
AT M C ell  
A 1  
A 1  
A 1  
A 1  
A 1  
A 1  
A 1  
A 1  
A 1  
A 1  
A 1  
AT M C ell  
AT M C ell  
AT M C ell  
AT M C ell  
AT M C ell  
AT M C ell  
AT M C ell  
AT M C ell  
X
C 1  
AT M C ell  
Tw elfth AT M C ell  
53 octets  
P O I : P ath O verhead Indicator  
P O H : P ath O verhead  
B IP 8 : B it Interleaved P arity - 8  
X : U nassigned  
Figure 6-7: DS3 PLCP Frame Format  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Line Interface  
Hardware Interface  
E3 Frame Format  
■
■
For public network UNI and private network UNI/NNI  
Physical layer  
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
❑
ITU-T G703  
G751  
G804  
G832  
I432  
ETSI T/NA (91)18  
■
■
■
■
Coaxial cable  
Line coding: HDB3  
Data rate/line rate: 34.368 Mbps +/-20ppm  
Cell rate: 33.92 Mbps (G832), 34.01 Mbps (G751 Direct Mapping)  
59 octets  
FA1 FA2  
EM  
TR  
530 octets  
payload  
M A  
NR  
GC  
9 rows  
Figure 6-8: G.832 E3 Frame Format  
6-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Interface  
Line Interface  
J
FAS : Fram e alignm ent signal  
RAI : Alarm indication to the rem ote digital m ultiplex equipm ent  
N.U : Bit reserved for national use  
JSB : Justification service bits  
BTAJ : Bits from tributaire available for justification  
Figure 6-9: G.751 E3 Frame Format  
1
1
1
8
7
P 6  
P 5  
1
53 octets  
First ATM Cell  
ATM Cell  
A1 A2  
A1 A2  
A1 A2  
A1 A2  
A1 A2  
A1 A2  
A1 A2  
A1 A2  
A1 A2  
P
P
Z3  
Z2  
Z1  
F1  
B1  
G1  
M 2(1)  
M 1(2)  
C1  
ATM Cell  
ATM Cell  
ATM Cell  
ATM Cell  
ATM Cell  
ATM Cell  
4
P
P 3  
P 2  
P 1  
18(17) to 20(21) octets  
Trailer  
0
P
Last ATM Cell  
125  
s
A1,A2  
P0-P8  
C1  
M 1,M 2  
G1  
B1  
F1  
Z1-Z3  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
fram ing octets.  
path overhead idenfier octet.  
cycle stuff counter.  
DQDB layer m anagem ent inform ation octets.  
PLCP path status.  
Bit Interleaved Parity-8 (BIP-8)  
PLCP path user channel.  
growth octets.  
.
Figure 6-10: G.832 (G.751) E3 PLCP Frame Format  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Line Interface  
Hardware Interface  
NN I  
UN I  
M SB  
G FC (4)  
VPI(4)  
VCI(8)  
LSB  
VPI(4)  
VCI(4)  
M SB  
LSB  
VPI(8)  
VPI(4)  
VCI(4)  
VCI(8)  
CLP  
CLP  
UN I: U ser-Netw ork Interface  
NN I: N etwork-N etwork Interface  
VCI(4) PT(3) (1)  
HEC (8)  
VCI(4) PT(3) (1)  
HEC (8)  
G FC : G eneric Flow Control  
VPI: Virtual Path Identifier  
VCI: Virtual C hannel Identifier  
User Inform ation  
User Inform ation  
PT:  
Payload Type  
CLP: Cell Loss Priority  
HEC : Header Error C ontrol  
use  
G FC  
VPI  
VCI  
0
PT  
x
CLP  
unassigned cell  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
0,2  
0-3  
0,2  
0,2  
0-3  
m eta signalling (default VPI=0)  
general broadcast signalling (default VPI=0)  
segm ent OAM F4  
1
2
3
4
end-to-end O AM F4  
point-to-point signalling (default VPI=0)  
ILM I (Interim Local M anagem ent Interface)  
user data cell, no congestion, SDU -type=0  
user data cell, congestion, SDU-type=1  
user data cell, congestion, SDU-type=0  
user data cell, no congestion, SDU -type=1  
segm ent OAM F5  
5
16  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
any  
value  
other  
than  
0
x
0
end-to-end O AM F5  
reserved for traffic cont. and resource m an.  
reserved  
norm al priority  
lower priority  
0
1
Figure 6-11: ATM Cell Format  
6-10  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Installation  
This section describes procedures for installing the ATM Switch.  
Check the contents of the package and move the ATM  
Switch to installation site or mount on optional chassis.  
Move to installation site  
Connect the cables  
Turn on the power  
Set data  
Connect the cables (communications power cable  
and RS 2320 cable) to the ATM Switch. Connect  
MAT to the other end of the RS-232C cable.  
Insert the PCMCIA card into the ATM Switch.  
Turn on the power.  
Set the system configuration data. For details, refer  
to Command Manual.  
Check operation  
Begin operation  
Run operation test to make sure the ATM Switch is  
running properly.  
Figure 7-1: Procedures for Installing the ATM Switch  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
7-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation Conditions  
Installation  
Installation Conditions  
This section provides precautions on the installation area of the ATM Switch. Be  
sure to install the ATM Switch in an environment that meets the conditions  
described in this chapter. For more information, refer to "Precautionary Messages"  
on Page 1-1.  
Environmental conditions under which Nortel Networks guarantees the ATM  
Switch will function:  
Environmental  
Conditions  
■
■
■
Temperature: 41~104°F (5~40°C)  
Humidity: 10~80% (must be free of condensation)  
Storage temperature: 23~113°F (-5~45°C)  
7-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installation  
Installation Conditions  
The air flows from the right to left as shown in Figure 7-2.  
Installation  
Space  
Figure 7-2: Air Flow  
To allow the ATM Switch to radiate heat, be sure to install it sufficiently  
away from walls and other equipment.  
Allow adequate distance away from areas prone to heavy foot traffic and from  
doors.  
Installation area necessary when installing the ATM Switch is as follows.  
Floor Space Requirements  
Centillion  
Figure 7-3: Floor Space Requirements  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
7-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation Conditions  
Installation  
Chassis Space Requirements  
Centillion  
Figure 7-4: Chassis Space Requirements  
Cable Space Requirements  
Centillion  
Figure 7-5: Cable Space Requirements  
7-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
Installation Conditions  
■
■
■
■
■
■
Areas safe from exposure to water or chemicals.  
Areas that are isolated from shocks and vibration.  
Horizontal areas.  
Areas Suitable  
for Installation  
Areas where there is little dust.  
Areas shielded from direct sunlight.  
Areas isolated from equipment generating strong magnetism (for example,  
television set, speakers).  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
7-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking the Package Contents and Preparation for Setting  
Installation  
Checking the Package Contents and Preparation for Setting  
This section describes the contents of the package and preparation for setting.  
Make sure that the box holding the ATM Switch contains two packages (three  
packages with an optional item) shown below:  
Packages  
■
■
■
The ATM Switch main unit package  
PCMCIA ATA (flash disk) card package  
PCMCIA LAN card package (optional)  
Make sure all the products are contained in the packages. Product lists are provided  
below.  
Packing List  
■
The ATM Switch main unit package  
❑
❑
The ATM Switch main unit  
Power cable  
The following parts are installed on the ATM Switch main unit. Types and quanti-  
ties differ depending on the system configuration.  
NOTE  
■
■
■
■
■
Switch/CPU card  
Line cards  
Fan unit  
Power unit  
PCMCIA ATA (flash disk) card package  
❑
PCMCIA ATA (flash disk) card  
■
PCMCIA LAN card package (optional)  
❑
❑
❑
PCMCIA LAN card  
Cable  
Relay connector  
7-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installation  
Checking the Package Contents and Preparation for Setting  
■
■
Tools  
Tools and  
Equipment  
Necessary for  
Installation  
Use Phillips screwdrivers.  
MAT  
MAT is a terminal for setting the configuration data of the ATM Switch and  
performing routine management of the equipment. Some of the terminals that  
may be used as a MAT are a personal computer (PC), workstation (WS), or  
dumb terminal with an RS-232C port and communications capability. The  
MAT and the ATM Switch are connected via an RS-232C cross cable.  
■
■
Electrostatic kit and clean gloves  
Static electricity may cause the ATM Switch to fail. Be sure to use the  
electrostatic kit and clean gloves.  
RS-232C cross cable  
This cable is used to interconnect the ATM Switch to a PC or workstation that  
supports serial communication software and can act as a VT100 terminal or a  
MAT. The null-modem cable has a D-SUB 9-pin male connector connected to  
the 8550 and the other end varies from a D-SUB 9-pin female connector (for  
connection to a PC) or a 25-pin male connector (for connection to a  
workstation). Connector gender changers may be used to acquire the correct  
connector type.  
■
Communications software  
When using a PC or WS as the MAT, install the proper communications  
software for the model and establish an interface that facilitates automatic  
controls.  
No communications software is required when the PC or WS is used in terminal  
mode. The installation of a communications software is recommended, however,  
to facilitate operations.  
NOTE  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
7-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Checking the Package Contents and Preparation for Setting  
Installation  
Once you have checked the contents of the packages, move the ATM Switch to the  
new installation site. Before moving the ATM Switch, though, make sure the  
installation area meets the conditions of the installation environment described  
above. In addition, when carrying the ATM Switch, be sure to support the bottom  
of the ATM Switch with both hands.  
Transfer  
Figure 7-6: Main Unit Transfer  
When carrying the main unit, be sure to hold the specified positions. Hold-  
ing positions other than the specified positions may not only cause a failure  
but may cause the ATM Switch to fall and result in bodily injury.  
7-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Mounting of Switch on Chassis  
Mounting of Switch on Chassis  
This section explains how to mount the ATM Switch on the chassis.  
The ATM Switch chassis is optional. Refer to the preceding section on “Installation  
Environmental Conditions” for the space necessary for chassis installation.  
Recommended  
Chassis  
Figure 7-7: Recommended Chassis  
From the left:  
■
■
■
■
E176 JEB SPL Chassis (depth: 23.7 in. / 600 mm)  
E178 JEB SPL Chassis (depth: 31.5 in. / 800 mm)  
E116 JEB SPL Chassis (depth: 23.7 in. / 600 mm)  
E118 JEB SPL Chassis (depth: 31.5 in. / 800 mm)  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
7-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Mounting of Switch on Chassis  
Installation  
Install chassis brackets on the left and right sides of the ATM Switch. The  
chassis brackets are designed to be installed on a 19-inch chassis whose depth  
is either 23.7 inches (600 mm) or 31.5 inches (800 mm), depending on which  
chassis is used.  
Installing the  
Chassis Brackets  
1.  
2.  
Securely fasten the chassis brackets to the main unit with two screws on the  
left and right.  
Figure 7-8: Chassis Bracket Installation  
Mount the shelf, then securely affix to the chassis at the two locations in the front.  
Installing the  
Shelf  
Figure 7-9: Shelf Installation  
7-10  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
Mounting of Switch on Chassis  
ATM Switch  
Installation  
Install the assembly of the ATM Switch and chassis brackets above the shelf  
installed on the chassis.  
1.  
2.  
Securely fasten the ATM Switch to the chassis with the two screws to the left  
and right on the front of the chassis brackets.  
Figure 7-10: ATM Switch Installation  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
7-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting Communication Cables  
Installation  
Connecting Communication Cables  
This section describes the various communication cables connected to the line  
cards installed in the ATM Switch and how to connect them.  
The following types of communication cables are available for the ATM Switch:  
Types of  
Communication  
Cables  
Physical Layer  
OC-12/STM-4  
OC-3/STM-1  
OC-3/STM-1  
TAXI  
Throughput  
622 Mbps  
155 Mbps  
155 Mbps  
100 Mbps  
155 Mbps  
Transmission Medium Connector  
Single mode optical fiber SC  
Multi mode optical fiber SC  
Single mode optical fiber SC  
Multi mode fiber  
UTP-5  
SC  
OC-3/STM-1  
RJ-45modular  
jack  
J2  
6.3 Mbps  
45 Mbps  
34 Mbps  
Coaxial cable  
Coaxial cable  
Coaxial cable  
BNC  
BNC  
BNC  
DS3  
E3  
Optical Cables  
There are two types of optical cables: single-mode optical fiber cables and multi-  
mode optical fiber cables. The single-mode optical fiber cables are used for OC-  
12c and OC-3c/STM1-SMF and the multi-mode optical fiber cables for OC-3c/  
STM-1-MMF and TAXI.  
The single-mode optical fiber cables used for the ATM Switch have core/clad  
diameters of 9.5/125 µm and the multi-mode optical fiber cables of 50/125 µm or  
62.5/125 µm.  
The optical cables are connected with SC connectors. When connecting the cables,  
be careful of the transmission-reception direction. Be sure to connect one end to the  
transmission side and the other to the reception side.  
Optical fiber cable can transmit cells over a distance so as long as the optical  
reception level shown in the following table is satisfied.  
Cable Type Optical Reception Level [dBm]  
SMF-Long  
SMF-Short  
MMF  
-34~-8  
-28~-8  
-30~-14  
7-12  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installation  
Connecting Communication Cables  
Unshielded Twisted Pair Cables  
The ATM Switch uses UTP (Unshielded Twisted Pair) category 5 cables for OC-  
3c/STM1-UTP-5.  
The UTP-5 cables are connected with RJ-45 modular connectors.  
The pin assignment of the RJ-45 modular jacks conform to that of ATM Network  
Equipment of ATM Forum UNI standard Ver 3.1.  
Maximum transmission distance is 328 ft. (100 m).  
Pin No.  
Signal  
Receive+  
Receive-  
NC  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NC  
NC  
NC  
Transmit+  
Transmit-  
Twisted Pair Cables  
Twisted pair cables are connected with RJ-45 connectors. Twisted pair cables are  
used for Primary, DS1, and E1. When equipment is installed in a Central Office  
environment, shielded cables and connectors must be used.  
Coaxial Cables  
Coaxial cables are connected with BNC connectors. Coaxial cables are used for  
6.3M-J2, 45M-DS3 and 34M-E3. 6.3M uses a 3C-2V coaxial cable to transmit cells  
up to 200 m.  
The type and quantity of cables differ from one line card to another. Prepare the  
necessary cables in necessary quantities and connect the line cards.  
Connection  
Be careful of the cable type (single-mode or multi-mode) and the transmission-  
reception direction when connecting optical fiber cable and the transmission-  
reception direction when connecting coaxial cable.  
Whatever the cable type, be sure to connect them securely.  
Always hold the connector when connecting or disconnecting cable. Holding the  
cable or pulling on the cable may cause disconnection.  
NOTE  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
7-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Inserting PCMCIA Cards  
Installation  
Connect the MAT to the ATM Switch. Refer to "Physical Connection of MAT" on  
page 9-3.  
MAT Connection  
Inserting PCMCIA Cards  
Insert a PCMCIA ATA card into the PCMCIA card slot in the front of the switch/  
CPU card.  
Figure 7-11: Inserting ATA Card  
7-14  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installation  
Turning Power On and Off  
Turning Power On and Off  
This section describes the procedures for connecting the power cable to the ATM  
Switch and the procedures for turning the power on and off.  
Make sure the power unit fastening screw on the back of the ATM Switch is  
properly screwed. Connect the power cable to the power connector and the other  
end of the cable to power supply, for example, the power outlet.  
Connecting the  
Power Cable  
Figure 7-12: Connecting the Power Cable  
NOTE  
DC power cable : White (0V), Brack (-48V), Green(FG)  
Since maximum power consumption is large, be sure to draw power directly from  
an outlet. Never share the same outlet with other devices. Never connect the  
ground wire to a gas pipe.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
7-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Turning Power On and Off  
Installation  
Procedures for turning on the ATM Switch's power are shown below.  
Turning the  
Power On  
Turn on the power switch on the back of the equipment by raising the switch  
up. If the power unit is redundant, turn on both power switches.  
1.  
Confirm that the POWER LED and the READY LED in the lower right area  
of the front of the ATM Switch are lighted green.  
2.  
The ATM Switch's self-diagnosis function is activated every time its power is  
turned on and every time it is reset. The results of the self-diagnosis are output to  
the MAT that is connected to the ATM Switch.  
When self-diagnosis function is executed, make sure the output message does not  
contain “NG” or “Not Installed” for slot numbers corresponding to slots in which  
a line card is installed. Also confirm that the ALARM LED in the lower right area  
of the ATM Switch is not lighted.  
Shown below is a sample output when the ATM Switch is started.  
The system is coming up now.  
If you want to enter boot program, push [ESC]  
key immediately.  
If the [ESC] key is detected within 3 seconds,  
boot program is loaded.  
Otherwise, online program will be loaded from  
the flash memory.  
ATA0=00000000--->dram=a0020000:size=00000200  
ATA0=00001000--->dram=a0030000:size=00007000  
ATA0=00008000--->dram=a0038000:size=00008000  
:
:
Nortel Networks Corporation  
ATM Service Node Model 5E  
Software Version X.X(X)  
Boot Program Version X.XX DD MM YY  
Hardware Configuration:  
CPU Board: OK;  
Switch Board: OK;  
PCMCIA 00: ATA OK;  
PCMCIA 01: LAN OK;  
Slot 00: OC-3C(MMF)OK;  
Slot 01: OC-3C(MMF)OK;  
Slot 02: Not Installed;  
Slot 03: Not Installed;  
System Initialization Complete  
Figure 7-13: Sample MAT Display when ATM Switch is Started  
7-16  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installation  
Turning Power On and Off  
Procedures for turning off the ATM Switch's power are shown below.  
Turning the  
Power Off  
Turn off the power switch on the back of the equipment. If the power unit is  
redundant, turn off both power switches.  
1.  
Confirm that the POWER LED and the READY LED in the lower right area  
of the front of the ATM Switch are off.  
2.  
All communications will be severed when the power is turned off. All  
unsaved setting data will also be lost. In principle, do not allow anyone  
other than the system manager and service personnel to touch the power  
switch.  
To replace one of the power units during operation, only turn off the power of the  
power unit you wish to replace.  
Shown below is the power supply and power consumption of the ATM Switch.  
Power Source  
and Power  
■
Input  
Consumption  
❑
❑
DC -48V  
Input voltage: -40V to -58V DC  
■
Maximum power consumption  
6.0 A  
❑
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
7-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting System Configuration Data  
Installation  
Setting System Configuration Data  
Set system configuration data of the newly installed ATM Switch from the MAT  
connected to it.  
Refer to the Command Manual for the commands from the MAT.  
Before performing an operation test, make sure that no error response has been  
output after setting configuration data (see above).  
Operation Check  
This section describes the procedures for performing an operation test after the  
ATM Switch is installed.  
ATM Switch Alarms  
Check for the ATM Switch hardware errors by entering a command from the MAT.  
The following hardware operation tests should be performed:  
■
■
■
■
Switch/CPU card  
Line cards  
Fan unit  
Power unit  
Enter the command for performing the hardware operation test. The command  
should be entered as follows:  
1.  
DISPLAY alarm[RETURN]  
After entering the command, make sure only the prompt is displayed on the  
MAT screen. A response is displayed only when an error has been detected.  
2.  
7-18  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installation  
Setting System Configuration Data  
Test the line interface of the line cards installed in the ATM Switch by entering a  
command from the MAT.  
Line Interface  
Test  
Enter the command for performing the line operation test. The command  
should be entered as follows:  
1.  
DISPLAY line[RETURN]  
After entering the command, response of the lines for which line cards are  
installed is displayed.  
2.  
3.  
Make sure that “GOOD” is the response for all lines for which line cards are  
installed. No response is displayed for a line for which no line card is installed.  
This completes the operation test. The ATM Switch can now be used properly.  
Follow the instructions below when using the equipment in a country or region  
where it must conform to EMI VCCI Type 1, FCC Class A, or EN55022 Class A.  
NOTE  
■
Coaxial cable  
As shown in the illustration below, install a ferrite core near the connector so  
the cable makes a loop.  
Figure 7-14: Ferrite Core Installation  
■
RS-232C cable  
❑
❑
❑
Use a metal connector  
Use a shielded cable  
Securely fasten the metal connector to the main unit  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
7-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting System Configuration Data  
Installation  
Follow the instructions below when using the equipment in a country or region  
where it must conform to EMI EN55022 Class B.  
NOTE  
■
■
■
■
Coaxial cable  
Install near the connector a ferrite core so the cable makes a loop. (See Figure  
number 7-14.)  
UTP cable  
Install near the connector a ferrite core so the cable makes a loop. (See Figure  
number 7-14.)  
AC power cable  
Install near the connector a ferrite core so the cable makes a loop. (See Figure  
number 7-14.).  
RS-232C cable  
❑
❑
❑
Use a metal connector.  
Use a shielded cable.  
Securely fasten the metal connector to the main unit.  
■
Do not use DS3, 6.3M interface cards.  
7-20  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
Basic Configuration and Setup  
This chapter explains the software setup and configuration of the ATM Switch.  
Hardware Installation and Connection  
Install and connect the hardware for the ATM Switch in the following order:  
Install line interface cards.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Install blank line interface panels (if necessary).  
Install power supply(ies).  
Connect the MAT terminal cable.  
Install the Ethernet PCMCIA card (optional).  
Connect the Ethernet cable (optional).  
At this point, you may want to connect a terminal to the MAT interface, so that  
you can observe and monitor the entire boot cycle. (See "MAT Connection"  
on page 7-14.)  
Connect the power cables to the rear of the ATM Switch.  
Turn on the ATM Switch power switch(es).  
8.  
9.  
If you have performed these steps properly, the ATM Switch should be fully  
operational. If the software does not load properly during the initial startup or is not  
the correct version, verify the PCMCIA software card is installed correctly, and  
follow the procedures outlined for installing new software versions. (See  
"Upgrading Software" on page 10-16.)  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
8-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Hardware Installation and Connection  
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Before performing the initial switch configuration, you should obtain the following  
information:  
Setting  
Configuration  
Data  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
Name of the switch (hostname)  
ATM address (NSAP address)  
Switch IP address (ATM management network)  
Switch IP netmask  
Clock source (network clocking structure)  
Enable password  
Telnet password  
Ethernet IP address (optional) (Ethernet management network)  
Ethernet IP netmask (optional)  
Once you have collected this information, continue with Step 1 below. Refer to  
Appendix C for configuration worksheets designed to help you obtain the necessary  
configurations prior to setting the switch.  
Using a terminal connected to the MAT interface (DB9) perform the following  
steps.  
Boot the ATM Switch interface.  
1.  
2.  
During the boot sequence, a self diagnosis of all components is performed by  
the ATM Switch, including all of the interfaces. Do one of the following:  
>
„If no errors were encountered during the self test, verify that the prompt is  
and go to the next step. If a switch name had been previously identified, it  
>
would be located to the left of the prompt.  
„If errors were encountered during the self test, turn the power off, verify that  
everything is installed properly, and turn the power back on.  
At this point, the operator is not logged into the privileged mode of the switch.  
Enter a question mark (?).  
NOTE  
3.  
The question mark (?) is a help request and can be entered at any point in a valid  
command. (Exception: during some configuration subroutines, help cannot be  
accomplished without exiting the command.) To continue viewing possible com-  
mands, hit any key; to stop, type q.  
NOTE  
Log into privileged mode by typing the following command.  
4.  
ENABLE  
During the initial setup, the enable and Telnet passwords should be set. An initial  
password must be assigned to enter privileged mode, but it can be changed later by  
using the PASSWDand TELNETPASSWDcommands.  
8-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Hardware Installation and Connection  
Enter a new enable password and press [RETURN]. Enter the password again  
to verify.  
5.  
6.  
Enter Telnet password and press [RETURN]. Enter the password again to  
verify.  
Do not lose these passwords.  
NOTE  
Once in privileged mode, the prompt changes from >to #. All commands are  
available in privileged mode. The next steps set the basic configuration parameters  
for the switch.  
Set the clock source.  
7.  
8.  
9.  
SET clock master  
Set the time and date of the switch.  
SET time [yy-mm-dd][hh:mm:ss]  
Set the local switch host name, ATM IP network address and netmask, and  
ATM network address.  
SET local [host name] [ATM IP network address]  
[ATM IP network netmask] [ATM address]  
The ATM network IP address must be on a different IP network from the Ethernet  
port. Please take caution in configuring both IP addresses to ensure that they are  
on different networks.  
NOTE  
If an Ethernet PCMCIA card is installed, continue with step 10 to configure the  
Ethernet interface to allow Telnet sessions to the MAT interface. Otherwise,  
continue with step 11.  
Set the Ethernet interface configuration.  
10.  
SET ether [Ethernet IP address[x.x.x.x]] [Ethernet  
IP mask [x.x.x.x]]  
Save the configuration.  
11.  
12.  
SAVE  
Reboot the switch by turning the power supply(s) off and then on.  
After modifying items such as clock source and switch addressing information  
and saving the configuration, reboot the switch to ensure that the new  
information is updated properly. (Refer to the RESET ?command in the  
Command Manual.)  
This completes the basic configuration and setup of the ATM Switch.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
8-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Software Upgrading  
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Optional Commands  
SET iproute- Configures an IP route within the switch, usually for remote hosts  
for network management, etc. Use this command when the network that you want  
to connect to is either connected to an ATM port or an Ethernet port. For more  
information, see the “SET iproute (Privileged Command)” section of the ATM  
Switch Command Manual.  
SET nms- If an NMS system is installed, this command allows up to 4 remote  
NMS systems to be installed. Options for this command allow you to set  
community name access and read/write privileges.  
DIAGNOSIS all- Performs a self test on all the components within the switch.  
This command takes a few minutes to execute and displays the results after  
completion.  
DISPLAY configuration all- Displays the current configuration defined  
within the switch. There are a number of default settings predefined within the  
switch. You may save time during configuration and setup by looking at the default  
configuration and determining what items are already configured to the desired  
setting.  
Software Upgrading  
See "Upgrading Software" on page 10-16.  
8-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Ongoing Configuration  
Ongoing Configuration  
This section describes how to configure different interface types and PVCs.  
Interface, ILMI,  
and SVC  
Signaling  
Interface Configuration  
The SET INTERFACEcommand sets the type of interface, such as Private UNI,  
Private NNI, or Public UNI. Each interface complies with ATM Forum  
specifications and has its own unique applications. If you want to keep the default  
interface configuration, you can skip this section.  
Display the current configuration of the interfaces.  
1.  
DISPLAY interface  
Line Interface Physical layer  
Forum/ITU Unassigned/Idle  
Valid  
VPI/VCI  
00 pri_UNI <dependent on card type> ATM Forum Unassigned  
01 pri_UNI <dependent on card type> ATM Forum Unassigned  
02 pri_UNI <dependent on card type> ATM Forum Unassigned  
03 pri_UNI <dependent on card type> ATM Forum Unassigned  
6/8  
6/8  
6/8  
6/8  
To display only a particular interface, use the following command:  
DISPLAY interface [slot number][port number]  
The default response should look something like this:  
Line:  
00  
Interface type  
Physical layer:  
Forum/ITU:  
Unassigned/Idle:  
Valid VPI:  
pri_UNI  
<dependent on card type>  
ATM Forum  
Unassigned  
6
8
Valid VCI:  
Because the default configuration is already active and in service, you must  
remove all connections before changing a port configuration.  
Suspend SVC activity for the port that you are modifying.  
2.  
3.  
SET svcline [slot number][port number] [vpi number]  
suspend  
Example: SET SVCline 23 0 suspend  
Delete the ILMI signaling PVC connection.  
DELETE ilmi [slot number][port number] [vpi number]  
This command deletes the ILMI PVC connection for the specified port. The  
default VPI/VCI of ILMI is 0/16.  
Example: DELETE ILMI 23 0  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
8-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Ongoing Configuration  
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Delete the SVC signaling PVC connection.  
4.  
DELETE signaling [slot number][port number] [vpi  
number]  
This command deletes the PVC connection signaling VCI for the specified  
port. The default VPI/VCI is 0/5.  
Example: DELETE sig 23 0  
Because of intelligent traffic being sent between ATM switches, sometimes the port  
configures itself with a PNNI signaling channel. If the interface needs to be  
modified, this PVC connection will also need to be deleted. The default PNNI VPI/  
VCI is 0/18.  
Delete the PNNI signaling PVC connection.  
5.  
DELETE pnni [slot number][port number] [vpi number]  
Example: DELETE PNNI 23 0  
At this time you are able to modify the interface port.  
Configure the interface.  
6.  
SET interface [slot number][port number]  
Example: SET int 23  
This command opens a configuration sub-routine. The parameters already  
identified in Step 1 will be prompted on an individual basis. Remember that the  
VPI and VCI bit field entries DO NOT identify the VPI/VCI that you will be using  
for the port. These two fields identify the number of bits that will be used for each  
field. The defaults are 6 and 8 for VPI and VCI, respectively.  
With the interface properly configured, ILMI signaling and PNNI should be  
restored (as needed).  
Install the ILMI and SVC signaling connections.  
SET ilmi [slot number][port number] [vpi]  
Example: SET ilmi 23  
7.  
Default=0  
VPI/VCI ilmi default=0/16  
SET signaling [slot number][port number] [vpi][vci]  
Example: SET sig 23  
Default=0  
VPI/VCI signaling default=0/5  
Sometimes the signaling parameters are incorrect for the port that you are  
configuring. Use the following command to check the parameters:  
8.  
DISPLAY atmsig  
This command displays all of the ports and their signaling parameters.  
8-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Ongoing Configuration  
Use the SET ATMSIGcommand to change the parameters of the signaling.  
9.  
SET atmsig [slot number][port number] [vpi number]  
This command will enter a configuration sub-routine which will prompt you  
for 12 different parameters, including the UNI version (3.0, 3.1 or 4.0) and the  
location of the port (logical network side or user side). It is not recommended  
that the timer values be changed unless the user is fully aware of the  
consequences.  
Once configured, the SVC signaling must be returned to normal operation.  
10.  
11.  
SET svcline [slot number][port number] [vpi number]  
resume  
Ifallisconfiguredproperly, theportshould beready torespondtoSVC requests.  
Continue with the next section which describes how to set up the PVCs.  
Install the PNNI signaling VCI. (This step is only required if the interface will  
be a NNI port.)  
SET pnni [slot number][port number] [vpi number]  
Example: SET pnni 23  
Default=0  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
8-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ongoing Configuration  
Basic Configuration and Setup  
The first part of any PVC setup is the definition of a profile. There are 16 available  
profiles that can be defined and configured. These profiles determine characteristics  
for shaping and managing traffic.  
PVC Setup and  
Installation  
When establishing a PVC, the traffic class (such as CBR, UBR, etc.), the QoS  
parameters, traffic shaping parameters, and UPC parameters can be set. The SET  
PROFILEcommand allows the user to specify the traffic type, unique name, PCR,  
SCR, MBS, and whether to use EPD. There are also 8 shapers that can be  
configured, with values for PCR, SCR, and MBS.  
The ATM Forum has the following table to assist with configuring profiles:  
Traffic  
Class  
PCR Flow Tagging Option  
Traffic  
Parameters  
PCR/CDPTp SCR/MBS/  
CDVTs  
CBR.1  
UBR.1  
UBR.2  
0+1  
0+1  
0+1  
N/A  
N/A  
Specified  
Specified  
Specified  
N/A  
N/A  
N/A  
Tagging against all  
CLP=0 cells  
Traffic  
Class  
UPC  
Mode  
Profile  
(Note1) Traffic  
Shaping (Note2)  
PCR  
EPD  
Off  
PCR  
SCR  
MBS  
N/A  
CBR.1  
UBR.1  
UBR.2  
1
1
5
Specified  
Specified  
Specified  
Specified N/A  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
Configure a profile for the PVC.  
1.  
SET profile [traffic type] [profile name[up to 10  
characters]]  
You may also be prompted to set the PCR at 1412830 (maximum) and EPD  
to on (1).  
Example: SET profile 4 PVC1 1412830 1  
The example defines a profile PVC1 with maximum PCR and EPD is on.  
Define a shaper for the PVC (optional).  
2.  
SET shaper [slot number][port number] [shaper  
number[1-8]] [PCR]  
Example: SET shaper 02 1 1412830 1412830 1412830  
The example defines shaper #1 for port 02 with maximum PCR, SCR, and  
MBS.  
8-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Ongoing Configuration  
Define a PVC.  
3.  
PVC establish [traffic direction] [traffic type]  
[originating slot number][originating port  
number][vpi][vci][destination slot  
number][destination port number] [vpi][vci] [orig-  
dest UPC mode] [orig-dest shaper number] [profile  
name] [dest-orig UPC mode] [dest-orig shaper number]  
[profile name]  
Example: PVC ESTABLISH 0 4 02 0 70 03 0 70 1 0 PVC1 1  
0 PVC1  
The example is a bi-directional UBR PVC, from port 02 to port 03, with UPC  
mode of 1 and no shaper assigned. It is using the profile PVC1.  
Once defined the PVC becomes operational.  
To examine the PVC, perform the command DISPLAY pvc [slot  
number][port number].  
(Refer to the DISPLAY pvccommand in the Command Manual.)  
Save the configuration. (optional)  
4.  
SAVE  
When changing the configuration, it is always a good idea to save the configura-  
tion.  
NOTE  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
8-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up LAN Emulation  
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Setting up LAN Emulation  
The following shows an example of LAN emulation with two ATM switches  
interconnected and a LAN emulation client attached to each switch.  
LAN emulation, as its name suggests, emulates an Ethernet LAN environment and  
is also known as MAC over ATM. Various protocols such as TCP/IP, Netware IPX,  
and Appletalk can be transported over the Ethernet. In this section we will assume  
that a successful LAN emulation environment is built by confirming a TCP/IP  
connection with a pingcommand between clients.  
LAN emulation requires a LAN Emulation Service within an emulated LAN to  
provide services for features of a shared media network which have to be specially  
emulated in a switched network, such as address resolution or broadcast message.  
An example is a broadcast message. An example is a broadcast message. A LAN  
emulation service consists of three servers: LAN Emulation Configuration Server  
(LECS), LAN Emulation Server (LES), and Broadcast/Unknown Server (BUS).  
All of these three servers are implemented in software within an 8550 switch  
interface card/or module which is not currently available for a product release.  
IP address:  
133.205.8.39  
PC  
LEC  
UNI 3.0  
Port 01, network  
NETNEX 8550-LES  
Network Prefix:  
LECS ATM address:  
LES ATM address:  
BUS ATM address:  
IP address:  
470079-00000000000000000000  
#1  
470079-00000000000000000000-777777777777-00  
470079-00000000000000000000-888888888888-00  
470079-00000000000000000000-999999999999-00  
133.205.8.10  
Clock: MASTER  
Port 00, network  
PNNI 0.5  
Network Prefix:  
IP address:  
470079-11111111111111111111  
133.205.8.1  
Port 00, user  
NETNEX 8550  
#2  
UNI 3.0  
Port 03, network  
IP address:  
133.205.8.xx  
PC  
LEC/MAT  
8-10  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Setting up LAN Emulation  
Use the following steps to set up shaded area of the diagram. All data in this section,  
including addresses, are examples:  
Connect cables as in the diagram above and power on all the equipment.  
1.  
2.  
Adjust the clock mode of the switch (#2) to SLAVE. The LES is set to provide  
a MASTER clock.  
Check the switch’s local information.  
3.  
4.  
DISPLAY network  
Set the line interface card parameters, ILMI parameters and ATM signaling  
parameters. (For both PNNI interface port 00 and UNI interface port 03.)  
If connections such as an ILMI signaling or PNNI exist for that port, those  
must be deleted before line interface parameters can be changed.  
DEL signaling 00 0  
DEL ilmi 00 0  
DEL signaling 03 0  
DEL ilmi 03 0  
Set the line interface parameters for PNNI interface port 00.  
5.  
6.  
SET interface 00  
Interface (pri_uni|0 pri_nni|1 pub_uni|2)? 1  
Forum/ITU (forum|0 itu|1)? 0  
IDLE Cell (unassigned|0 idle|1)? 0  
Valid VPI (0-8[bit])? 6 (based on interface type)  
Valid VCI (0-8[bit])? 8 (based on interface type)  
Line Interface 00 has been registered.  
Set the line interface parameters for UNI interface port 03.  
SET interface 03  
Interface (pri_uni|0 pri_nni|1 pub_uni|2)? 0  
Forum/ITU (forum|0 itu|1)? 0  
IDLE Cell (unassigned|0 idle|1)? 0  
Valid VPI (0-8[bit])? 0  
Valid VCI (0-8[bit])? 10  
Line Interface 03 has been registered.  
If a line interface port is connected to an ATM-NIC, verify that the Valid VPI  
and Valid VCI values are 0 and 10 respectively. The ATM-NIC in this example  
only supports VPI=0 and VCI up to 1023.  
If the NIC attached to the line interface port carries Management Information  
Base (MIB) information, ILMI can automatically obtain these valid VPI and  
VCI parameters, otherwise they must be set manually.  
For UNI interface port 03 connected to the ATM-NIC, set ILMI timing  
parameters. ILMI uses VPI/VCI=0/16.  
7.  
SET ilmi 03 0 16 5 60 20  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
8-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting up LAN Emulation  
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Adjust ILMI timing parameters. This is specific to a connection to an ATM-  
NIC. Use the following values: Timer value = 5, Times of retry = 60 (default)  
and Keepalive = 20.  
Before svcline can be turned on, you must:  
8.  
SET signaling 00 0 5  
Re-set the signaling connection deleted  
previously. A signaling connection is set  
with VPI/VCI=0/5  
SET signaling 03 0 5  
When connecting two switches together, one has to be set to Network side and  
another set to User side. (In this example, 8550-LES is set to Network side;  
therefore, 8550 must be set to User side.)  
9.  
For PNNI interface port 00:  
SET atmsig 00 0  
Interface (network|0 user|1)? 1  
T303 (1-255,default=4)? 4  
T308 (1-511,default=30)? 30  
T309 (1-511,default=90)? 90  
T310 (1-255,default=10)? 10  
T313 (1-255,default=4)? 4  
T316 (1-511,default=120)? 120  
T317 (1-255,default=60)? 60  
T322 (1-255,default=4)? 4  
T398 (1-255,default=4)? 4  
T399 (1-511,default=14)? 4  
UNI Version (UNI3.0|0 UNI3.1|1,default=3.0)? 3.0  
For UNI interface port 03:  
10.  
SET atmsig 03 0  
Interface (network|0 user|1)? 0  
T303 (1-255,default=4)? 4  
T308 (1-511,default=30)? 30  
T309 (1-511,default=90)? 90  
T310 (1-255,default=10)? 10  
T313 (1-255,default=4)? 4  
T316 (1-511,default=120)? 120  
T317 (1-255,default=60)? 60  
T322 (1-255,default=4)? 4  
T398 (1-255,default=4)? 4  
T399 (1-511,default=14)? 4  
UNI Version (UNI3.0|0 UNI3.1|1,default=3.0)? 3.0  
Set UNI 3.0  
SET svcline 00 resume  
SET svcline 03 resume  
8-12  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic Configuration and Setup  
Setting up LAN Emulation  
For the PNNI interface port 00, set a PNNI connection. Use values, VPI=0 and  
VCI=18.  
11.  
12.  
SET pnni 00 0 18  
Manually register an address of LECS to the switch. Upon an ILMI query of  
the LECS address from a prospective LE client, the switch will inform the  
LECS address registered with this command.  
SET configserver 0 4700790000000000000000000077777777777700  
LECS ATM address  
LECS index (Up to 4 LECS can be registered.)  
Save the configuration data you have just entered.  
13.  
14.  
15.  
SAVE  
Confirm that SVCLINE mode for connected line interface ports are enabled.  
DISPLAY svcline [slot number][port number]  
Confirm that dynamic SVC connections are established for connected line  
interface ports.  
DISPLAY dynamicroute [slot number][port number]  
Confirm that SVC connections for each connected line interface ports.  
16.  
[slot number][port number]  
DISPLAY svc  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
8-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SVC Tunneling  
Basic Configuration and Setup  
SVC Tunneling  
This section describes how to interconnect two ATM Switches (1 & 2) configured  
for LAN Emulation with an LE client attached to each, over a PVC connection  
using a SVC tunneling technique.  
470079-11111111111111111111  
470079-22222222222222222222  
ATM  
ATM  
Switch  
00.u  
Switch  
00.n  
(1)  
001  
000  
(2)  
ATM Switch  
(3)  
(PVC)  
VPI = 1  
Clock:  
PC  
PC  
LES/MAT  
LES/LEC  
133.205.8.54  
133.205.8.39  
Figure 8-1: SVC Tunneling  
Refer to Figure 8-1 and make cable connections.  
1.  
2.  
Set up both LE clients and Switch 3 configurations except for switch  
interconnections.  
On Switch 1 and 2, set interface 00 to a NNI port.  
On Switch 2, set to User Side.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
On Switch 1 and 2, execute the following commands:  
SET tunnel 00 1  
SET signal 00 1  
SET ILMI 00 1  
On Switch 1 execute the following command:  
6.  
7.  
8.  
route add NSAP 47007922 00 1  
On Switch 2 execute the following command:  
route add NSAP 47007911 00 1  
SAVE  
All signaling, ILMI and SVCs will use VPI and will pass unobstructed through  
Switch 3.  
NOTE  
8-14  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
9
Maintenance and Operations  
This section describes how the ATM Switch is operated, maintained, and managed.  
Overview  
The ATM Switch is primarily maintained and operated using a dedicated terminal  
called MAT that is connected to the ATM Switch via RS-232C. Some of the  
functions may also be performed from an NMS connected via the ATM or Ether  
network. SNMP, the standard protocol for Internet hardware, is used over UDP/IP/  
SNAP/LLC/AAL5 for communications between the NMS and the ATM Switch.  
Figure 9-1 illustrates how the MAT and the NMS are used to control maintenance  
operations.  
Centillion  
Figure 9-1: Control with MAT and NMS  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
9-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
MAT and NMS  
Maintenance and Operations  
MAT and NMS  
The primary functions that can be used from a MAT and NMS are as listed below.  
MAT  
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Initialize the system  
Input system configuration data  
Set, delete, or display PVC (including connection with NMS)  
Set, delete, or display SVC routing table  
Display system alarm and line alarm  
Display the operation status of a line card  
Display the types of line cards mounted  
NMS  
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
Display/set PVC  
Display system alarm and line alarm  
Display the operation status of a line card  
Display the types of line cards mounted  
Display SVC (number of connections only)  
Monitor traffic  
Display trap  
The ATM Switch is mainly controlled by commands sent from an external MAT  
connected via RS-232C interface.  
MAT  
Any terminal equipped with an RS-232C port and communications capability may  
be used as the MAT.  
MAT may be connected when necessary or left connected to the ATM Switch.  
However, note that the ATM Switch will not automatically display messages on  
MAT other than when power is turned on or the ATM Switch is reset.  
Also note that RS-232C cross cable for connecting the MAT and communication  
software is not supplied with the ATM Switch.  
9-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance and Operations  
MAT and NMS  
In connecting the ATM Switch and MAT, use a RS-232C cross cable fitted on one  
end with a D-SUB 9 pin (male) connector for the ATM Switch and on the other end  
with a connector meeting the shape of the MAT side connector.  
Physical  
Connection of  
MAT  
There are two types of RS-232C cables used, straight cable and cross cable,  
depending on the difference in the connection conditions of signal lines. Use the  
RS-232C cross cable for connecting the ATM Switch and MAT.  
The RS-232C connector of the MAT differs in shape depending on the model of the  
MAT. Use an RS-232C cross cable that has on one end a connector that can be  
connected to the MAT and on the other end a D-SUB 9-pin male connector for the  
ATM Switch.  
This section describes how to set PC9801 or IBM-PC as the MAT.  
Figure 9-2 and Figure 9-3 show the RS-232C connector. Figure 9-4 and  
Figure 9-5 show the connection method with a PC9801 and an IBM-PC,  
respectively.  
The shape of the RS-232C connector on the 98 side is a D-SUB 25-pin (male)  
connector.  
The shape of the RS-232C connector on the IBM-PC side is a D-SUB 9-pin (male)  
connector.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
9-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MAT and NMS  
Maintenance and Operations  
Specifications of the ATM Switch RS-232C connector are shown below.  
Figure 9-2: PC98-ATM Switch RS-232C Connector  
Figure 9-3: IBM-PC-ATM Switch Interface RS-232C Connector  
1 (DCD)  
2 TxD  
2 RxD  
3 RxD  
4 RST  
3 TxD  
4 DTR  
5 CTS  
6 DSR  
5 SG  
6 DSR  
7 SG  
7 RTS  
8 DCD  
20 DTR  
8 CTS  
9 (RI)  
NEX  
NET  
8550  
PC-98  
Figure 9-4: Connection with PC98  
9-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintenance and Operations  
MAT and NMS  
1 (DCD)  
2 RxD  
1 (DCD)  
2 RxD  
3 TxD  
4 DTR  
3 TxD  
4 DTR  
5 SG  
5 SG  
6 DSR  
6 DSR  
7 RTS  
7 RTS  
8 CTS  
9 (RI)  
8 CTS  
9 (RI)  
NEX  
NET  
8550  
IBM -PC  
Figure 9-5: Connection with IBM-PC  
The ATM Switch is equipped with a RS-232C connector on the front of the switch/  
CPU card. The RS-232C cable may be inserted or removed whether or not power  
is supplied to the ATM Switch.  
Connection  
Figure 9-6: Example of the ATM Switch MAT Connection  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
9-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
MAT and NMS  
Maintenance and Operations  
A dumb terminal may be used as MAT, but when using a personal computer or  
workstation as MAT, it is recommended that you use communication software  
compatible to the hardware model you are using.  
Communications  
Software  
Setting the MAT  
Turn on the power switch of the MAT. Set the communications parameters of the  
MAT as follows. For instructions on setting the parameters, refer to the manual on  
the installed communications software.  
■
■
■
■
■
Line rate:  
9600 Bps  
Character bit length: 8 bits  
Stop bit length:  
Parity:  
1 bit  
None  
Yes  
Flow control:  
MAT Screen Display  
MAT's standard screen size is a text screen of 80 × 24 lines.  
All the commands entered by the user and the responses to the commands are  
scroll-displayed on the same screen.  
In the event the screen size of the commands and responses combined exceeds 24  
lines, the screen will stop to scroll. Scroll can be resumed by pressing any key  
except “Q”.  
The number of lines displayed on the screen can be changed by using the  
SET scrollcommand.  
9-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maintenance and Operations  
NMS  
NMS  
The ATM Switch may be operated and managed from personal computers and  
workstations called MATs as well as from the NMS that is connected to the ATM  
Switch via ATM or ether network.  
SNMP, the standard protocol for Internet hardware, is used over UDP/IP/SNAP/  
LLC/AAL5 for communications between the NMS and the ATM Switch. To realize  
this function, the ATM Switch maintains Management information base MIB-II  
stipulated by RFC1213.  
Q.2931  
SSCF  
SNM P  
UDP  
IP  
SSCS  
CS  
SSCOP  
SAAL  
CPCS  
SAR  
AAL5  
ATM  
PHY  
ATM  
PHY  
Call processing function  
NM S interface function  
Figure 9-7: Protocol Stack  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
9-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NMS  
Maintenance and Operations  
The CPU can exchange data with the NMS via ATM lines. To realize this function  
GWPAD assembles ATM cells into data and disassembles data into ATM cells.  
The CPU monitors errors in the hardware and sends to the NMS error  
information. Figure 9-8 shows how data is transferred from the NMS to CPU.  
NMS Interface  
(via ATM)  
ATM cell  
LINF  
NMS  
Data in ATM header  
is converted into  
address number  
ATM  
Sw itch  
ATM cell  
GWPAD  
Data addressed to CPU  
CPU  
Figure 9-8: NMS Interface (via ATM)  
By using a PCMCIA LAN card, the CPU can directly exchange data with NMS via  
Ethernet. Refer to "Inserting PCMCIA Cards" on Page 7-14 for details on the  
PCMCIA LAN card.  
NMS Interface  
(via Ethernet)  
9-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Maintenance and Operations  
Periodic Maintenance  
Periodic Maintenance  
This section describes the periodic maintenance that must be performed after the  
ATM Switch is put into operation.  
In general, the following two tasks are required for the operation, maintenance, and  
management of the ATM Switch:  
■
■
Check to make sure that the ATM Switch is operating properly.  
Take action when a fault is found.  
The system manager of the ATM Switch should perform the following periodic  
inspection to make sure that the ATM Switch is operating properly:  
■
■
■
Check visually  
Check with commands  
Diagnose the equipment  
In addition, when a fault is detected in the ATM Switch, take appropriate action.  
The user does not need to control the equipment once operation begins. The user  
merely needs to carefully read the Precautions on Handling the Product and the  
Handling Precautions in the following sections and provide an environment around  
the equipment so that the ATM Switch can function properly.  
When an error occurs to the equipment during operation, the ALARM LED on the  
front of the equipment will light. In this case, promptly call the system manager.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
9-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Periodic Maintenance  
Maintenance and Operations  
It is recommended that configuration data be backed up any time there have been  
changes made to the switch configuration that are intended to be permanent.  
Backing up  
Configuration  
Data  
Ethernet Interface  
Connect the TFTP server and the switch Ethernet port to a common Ethernet  
network. They may be directly connected to each other if an ethernet cross-  
connect cable is used.  
1.  
Set the Ethernet IP address of the switch using the SET ethercommand.  
2.  
3.  
If the two are not on the same Ether subnet, and are separated by a router, use  
the SET iproutecommand to direct the switch to the router.  
Backup the configuration data using the BACKUP configcommand.  
4.  
5.  
To download a backed up configuration into the switch using the  
INSTALL configcommand.  
ATM Interface  
Connect the switch and the workstation (TFTP server) with an ATM-PVC  
interface.  
1.  
Setup the ATM-PVC workstation (TFTP server) to use a PVC.  
2.  
3.  
Set the IP routing information within the switch such that the switch can upload  
the configuration data to a host within a different sub network. Use the  
SET iproutecommand.  
Backup the configuration data using the BACKUP configcommand.  
4.  
5.  
To download a backed up configuration into the switch, use the  
INSTALL configcommand.  
9-10  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Maintenance and Operations  
Periodic Maintenance  
Flash Memory Card  
Power off the ATM Switch.  
1.  
2.  
Insert a spare flash memory card (with an on-line program) into the PCMCIA  
slot #0 (bottom slot).  
Insert the flash memory card with configuration data into the PCMCIA slot #1  
(upper slot).  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Power up the ATM Switch while simultaneously pressing (and hold down) the  
“Esc”key on the MAT console. The 8550 will enter the boot program.  
At the BOOT# prompt, type the following:  
SET boot flash_up_save  
At the BOOT# prompt, type the following:  
exit  
6.  
Data from slot #1 will be copied to the card in slot #0.  
Recommended monthly.  
Cosmetic Check  
Since alarm status is checked directly from the MAT or NMS on as “as needed”  
basis, a cosmetic check of the ATM Switch is simply performed as routine, periodic  
maintenance.  
■
■
■
■
Is the ALARM LED lighted?  
Is there irregular noise?  
Is there warp, etc., in the shell?  
Is there a missing screw?  
Recommended every six months.  
Checking Cables  
and Connectors  
■
■
■
Is there a disconnected cable or a loose connector?  
Is there an excessive bend in a cable?  
Is a front plate installed on every open slot?  
Recommended every six months.  
Checking with  
MAT  
Check alarm status from a MAT using the DISPLAY alarmcommand.  
1.  
2.  
Perform system diagnosis from a MAT using the DIAGNOSIS ?command.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
9-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Periodic Maintenance  
Maintenance and Operations  
■
■
■
■
■
Wipe the main unit with dry cloth.  
Cleaning  
Do not allow water drops in the main unit.  
Do not let the cleaning cloth catch on a connector while cleaning.  
Do not use chemically-treated cloths as they may harm the paint.  
Do not place any foreign objects in the main unit.  
9-12  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
10  
Modifications  
This chapter describes the procedures for moving the ATM Switch to another  
location, replacing mounted packages, upgrading software, and adding hardware.  
Moving the Equipment  
This section describes the procedures for moving the ATM Switch to another  
location.  
Turn off the power switch of the ATM Switch and remove the power cable.  
1.  
If the power unit is redundant, be sure to remove both cables.  
NOTE  
Remove the communication cable connector from the ATM Switch.  
2.  
3.  
Move the ATM Switch to the new installation site. Make sure in advance that  
the installation site meets the installation environmental condition. Refer to  
"Installation Conditions" on page 7-2.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Moving the Equipment  
Modifications  
When carrying the main unit, be sure to securely hold the bottom of the main unit  
as shown in Figure 10-1.  
Figure 10-1: Carrying the ATM Switch  
Be sure to hold the specified positions. Holding positions other than the specified  
positions may cause a failure.  
NOTE  
Connect the power cable and the communication cable. Refer to "Connecting  
the Power Cable" on page 7-15.  
4.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
Connect the MAT to ATM Switch with RS-232C cable. Refer to "MAT  
Connection" on page 7-14.  
Turn on the MAT's power switch and set the communication parameters. Refer  
to "Setting the MAT" on page 9-6.  
Turn on the ATM Switch's power switch. Check the messages displayed on the  
MAT screen to make sure that the move did not cause a problem with the ATM  
Switch. Refer to "ATM Switch Alarms" on page 7-18.  
Enter the alarm message display command from the MAT to make sure that  
there is no hardware error. Refer to "ATM Switch Alarms" on page 7-18.  
8.  
10-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifications  
General Precautions on Handling Packages  
General Precautions on Handling Packages  
This section provides the procedures for installing units and packages on the ATM  
Switch.  
Pay attention to the following precautions when handling packages.  
Figure 10-2: Precaution - Wear Clean Gloves  
Figure 10-3: Precaution - Take Electrostatic Measures  
Figure 10-4: Precaution - Do Not Bend Cards  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Unit Installation  
Modifications  
Power Unit Installation  
This section describes the procedures for installing the power unit.  
Make sure the power switch of the power unit that is inserted is turned off.  
Inserting the  
Power Unit  
1.  
2.  
Remove the front cover from the front of the main unit. Refer to "Removing  
the Front Cover" on page 10-15.  
Figure 10-5: Removing the Front Cover  
Insert the power unit into the power unit slot. As the power unit can be made  
redundant, there are two slots, left and right. When using only one power unit,  
insert the power unit into the slot #0 that is on the left-hand side facing the  
main unit. When inserting the power unit, make sure you securely hold the  
power unit with both hands (as shown in Figure 10-6)and insert it all the way  
in until it is secure.  
3.  
10-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Modifications  
Power Unit Installation  
Figure 10-6: Inserting the Power Unit  
Make sure you use both hands and insert the power unit slowly. Inserting  
the power unit quickly may cause damage to the connector or a failure. An  
injury may result if you hold the power unit with only one hand.  
Tighten the screw on the back of the main unit to fix the power unit.  
4.  
5.  
Install power unit cover and securely fastenwith the screwsonboth ends. Make  
sure the right side is up when installing the power unit cover.  
Install the front cover. Refer to "Installing the Front Cover" on page 10-15.  
6.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Power Unit Installation  
Modifications  
Turn off the power switch on the back of the main unit (if redundant, only the  
power switch of the power unit to be removed).  
Removing the  
Power Unit  
1.  
Remove the power cable from the connector and remove the fastening screws.  
Remove the front cover.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
5.  
Turn the screws on both ends of the power unit cover and remove the cover.  
Hold the power unit securely with both hands as shown in Figure 10-7 and  
remove it slowly.  
Figure 10-7: Removing the Power Unit  
Be sure to turn the power off before inserting or removing the power unit.  
Leaving the power on while inserting or removing the power unit may cause  
the unit to fail.  
Install the power unit cover and securely fasten with the screws on both ends.  
Make sure the right side is up when installing the power unit cover.  
6.  
7.  
Install the front cover.  
If the power unit is redundant and one power unit is in operation, the other power  
unit can be inserted or removed without affecting the switching functions of the  
main unit.  
10-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Modifications  
Switch/CPU Card Installation  
Switch/CPU Card Installation  
This section describes the procedures for installing the switch/CPU card.  
Clean the connector with cleaner before inserting the switch/CPU card.  
Inserting the  
Switch/CPU Card  
1.  
2.  
Turn off the power switch on the back of the main unit. Turn off both switches  
if the power unit is redundant.  
Remove the front cover from the front of the main unit  
3.  
4.  
Insert the switch/CPU card into the switch/CPU card slot by running the card  
through the guide rails in the slot (inside the slot, there are two guide rails on  
the left-hand side for the switch and CPU card and one guide rail on the right-  
hand side for the CPU card). When inserting the switch/CPU card, securely  
hold the card with both hands (as shown in Figure 10-8) and insert the card  
evenly on the left and right sides. Finally, press the center of the front plate of  
the switch/CPU card with the thumbs of both hands until it clicks in place.  
Figure 10-8: Inserting the Switch/CPU Card  
Be sure to slowly insert the switch/CPU card with both hands. The connec-  
tor may become damaged or the switch/CPU card may fail if the switch/  
CPU card is inserted too quickly.  
Make sure the switch/CPU card is fitted into both left and right guide rails  
before inserting it. If the switch/CPU card is slid outside of the guide rails,  
the card may be damaged.  
Tighten the two screws on the left and right of the front plate of the switch/  
CPU card to fix the card in place.  
5.  
6.  
Install the front cover.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Switch/CPU Card Installation  
Modifications  
Turn off the power switch on the back of the main unit. Turn off both switches  
if the power unit is redundant.  
Removing the  
Switch/CPU Card  
1.  
Remove the front coverf from the front of the main unit.  
2.  
3.  
Remove the two screws on the left and right ends of the front plate of the switch/  
CPU card.  
Slowly remove the switch/CPU card with both hands.  
4.  
Figure 10-9: Removing the Switch/CPU Card  
Be sure to turn the power off before inserting or removing the switch/CPU  
card. Leaving the power on while inserting or removing the switch/CPU  
card may cause the unit to fail.  
10-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifications  
Line Card Installation  
Line Card Installation  
This section describes the procedures for installing a line card. It also describes the  
procedures for installing a front plate over an idle line card slot.  
Several types of line cards are available (listed below). They are all installed the  
same way.  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
OC-12c-SMF(622 Mbps) (from November 1996)  
OC-3c/STM-1 -MMF  
SMF, -UTP-5 (155 Mbps)  
TAXI-MMF(100 Mbps)  
J2 (6.3 Mbps), DS3 (45 Mbps)  
E3 (34 Mbps)  
FR-DS1  
CE-DS1  
CE-E1  
Clean the connector with cleaner before inserting the line card.  
Inserting a Line  
Card  
1.  
2.  
Each line card is equipped with ejectors. Close the ejectors before inserting  
the card.  
Figure 10-10: Line Card Ejectors - Closed Position  
Insert the line card all the way into the line card slot slowly and positively by  
running the card through the guide rails. As shown in Figure 10-11, securely  
3.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Line Card Installation  
Modifications  
hold the ejectors with both hands to insert the card.  
Figure 10-11: Inserting the Line Card  
Figure 10-12: When pushing the line card in, do not apply excess pressure  
on the left and right edges of the front of the plate. The plate may become  
deformed.  
Make sure the line card is fitted into both right and left guide rails before  
inserting it. If the line card is slid outside of the guide rails, it may cause a  
short-circuit.  
Push the line card slowly all the way into the slot. Otherwise, improper con-  
tact may result. In addition, a failure may result if you insert the line card  
too quickly.  
Tighten the screws on the left and right of the ejectors to fix the line card in  
place.  
4.  
5.  
Install the communication cable.  
Be sure to install a port cap or a loopback cable over line ports that are not  
in use. Unless an idle line port is covered with a port cap, dust may get  
inside the port and cause a failure.  
10-10  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifications  
Line Card Installation  
Remove the communication cable.  
Removing a Line  
Card  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Remove the screws to the left and right sides of the ejectors.  
Draw the ejectors outward to open position.  
Figure 10-13: Line Card Ejectors - Open Position  
Hold the line card with both hands and remove it slowly.  
4.  
Figure 10-14: Removing the Line Card  
Be sure to allow at least 3 seconds of interval when repeating line card  
removal or insertion. Failure may result if an adequate interval is not given.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Line Card Installation  
Modifications  
Be sure to install a front plate in slots without a line card to improve the air-cooling  
efficiency of the main unit and to suppress the radiation of noise.  
Installing the  
Front Plate  
Install the front plate into the line card slot.  
1.  
2.  
Tighten the screws on the left and right of the front plate to fix the front plate  
in place.  
Figure 10-15: Inserting the Front Plate  
Do not insert a hand into an idle slot to prevent injury from sharp guide rail  
corners, etc.  
Be sure to install a front plate over a slot not containing a line card. With-  
out the front plate, the slot will hinder proper cooling and may cause a fail-  
ure.  
Remove the screws on the left and right of the front plate that are fixing the  
front plate in place.  
Removing the  
Front Plate  
1.  
2.  
Remove the front plate.  
10-12  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Modifications  
Installing the Fan Unit  
Installing the Fan Unit  
This section describes the procedures for installing the fan unit.  
Clean the connector with cleaner before inserting the fan units.  
Remove the front cover from the front of the main unit.  
Inserting the Fan  
Unit  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Insert the fan unit into the fan unit slot. When inserting the fan unit, securely  
hold it with both hands (as shown in Figure 10-16) and insert it evenly on the  
left and right sides and on top and bottom. Make sure the fan unit is right side  
up.  
Figure 10-16: Inserting the Fan Unit  
Tighten the screw on the top of the fan unit front plate to fix the fan unit in place.  
Install the front cover.  
4.  
5.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Installing the Fan Unit  
Modifications  
Remove the front cover from the front of the main unit.  
Removing the  
Fan Unit  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Remove the screw on the top of the front plate of the fan unit.  
Securely hold the fan unit with both hands, as shown in Figure 10-17, and  
remove it straight out of the slot.  
Figure 10-17: Removing the Fan Unit  
The fan unit can be inserted or removed while the main unit is in operation.  
However, avoid running the main unit for an extended period of time with-  
out the fan unit. This may cause malfunction or failure.  
A fan unit that is removed when the main unit is in operation will continue  
to rotate for a while. Be sure to keep fingers and foreign objects out of the  
finger guard.  
10-14  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Modifications  
Installing the Front Cover  
Installing the Front Cover  
This section explains the procedure for installing the front cover.  
The front cover fit on the front of the main unit.  
Installing the  
Front Cover  
1.  
Figure 10-18: Installing the Front Cover  
Tighten the six screws of the front cover to securely fasten the front cover to  
the main unit.  
2.  
Remove the six screws of the front cover.  
Remove the front cover slowly.  
Removing the  
Front Cover  
1.  
2.  
Figure 10-19: Removing the Front Cover  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Upgrading Software  
Modifications  
Upgrading Software  
This section explains the procedure for upgrading the ATM Switch software.  
There are two types of PCMCIA cards used for upgrading the software of the ATM  
Switch.  
Inserting  
PCMCIA Cards  
„
„
ATA (flash disk) card  
LAN card (optional)  
Figure 10-20: PCMCIA Card - (Left: ATA Card; Right: LAN Card)  
Inserting and Removing an ATA Card  
ATA cards are handled in the same manner as normal PCMCIA cards. Insert an  
ATA card into the PCMCIA card slot in the front of the switch/CPU card. Insert the  
card securely and all the way in, until the ejector button on the side of the slot pops  
out. (Facing the main unit, the ejector button on the right is for slot #0, the one on  
the left is for slot #1).  
To remove the ATA card, press the ejector button on the side of the slot. The card  
will be automatically ejected.  
Inserting and Removing a LAN Card  
The LAN card is optional. It should be used to connect the ATM Switch to Ethernet  
(10BaseT).  
10-16  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Modifications  
Upgrading Software  
Insertion Procedure  
Before inserting the LAN card into the ATM Switch, connect the cable and  
relay connector as shown in Figure 10-21.  
1.  
Figure 10-21: LAN Card, Cable, and Relay Connector Connections  
Be sure to hold the connector when connecting or removing the cable. Pull-  
ing on the cable may cause the cable to break or the card to fail.  
Turn off the power switch of the ATM Switch.  
2.  
3.  
After connecting the cable and relay connector to the LAN card, insert the  
LAN card into the PCMCIA card slot in the front of the switch/CPU card.  
Insert the card securely and all the way in, until the ejector button on the side  
of the slot pops out. (Facing the main unit, the ejector button on the right is for  
slot #0, the one on the left is for slot #1).  
Be sure to turn off the equipment's power before inserting or removing the  
card. Inserting or removing the card without turning off the power may  
cause a malfunction or failure.  
Connect to the relay connector the UTP cable from the Ethernet (10BaseT) to  
be connected to the ATM Switch.  
4.  
5.  
Turn on the power switch of the ATM Switch.  
To remove the LAN card, press the ejector button on the side of the slot. The  
card will be automatically ejected.  
Refer to "PCMCIA Cards" on page 1-4 for instructions on handling the PCMCIA  
card.  
NOTE  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Upgrading Software  
Modifications  
The following software upgrade mode settings are available for the ATM Switch.  
Upgrading  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
FLASH  
FLASH_UP  
FLASH_UP_SAVE  
INITIALIZE  
INITIALIZE_SAVE  
NETWORK  
NETWORK_SAVE  
Use the boot monitor to set the upgrade mode. The boot monitor is started by  
pressing ESC from the MAT while the booting message is displayed when the  
power is turned on or the unit is reset. Once in the boot monitor, the display will  
show the “BOOT” prompt.  
The system is coming up now.  
If you want to enter boot program, push [ESC] key immediately.  
If the [ESC] key is detected within 3 seconds, boot program  
is loaded.  
BOOT#  
Figure 10-22: Starting the Boot Monitor  
10-18  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modifications  
Upgrading Software  
FLASH Mode  
Load the software from the ATA card mounted in the PCMCIA slot to start the  
software. The office data will return to the initial setting status. This is the default  
value of the boot mode.  
Figure 10-23: FLASH Mode  
Procedure  
Turn off the power of the ATM Switch.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Replace the old ATA card with the new version ATA card.  
Turn on the power of the ATM Switch.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Software  
Modifications  
FLASH_UP Mode  
Load the software from the ATA card mounted in the PCMCIA slot #0. The office  
data is loaded from the ATA card mounted in the PCMCIA slot #1. Office data is  
not saved.  
Figure 10-24: FLASH_UP Mode  
Procedure  
Turn off the power of the ATM Switch.  
1.  
2.  
Insert the new version ATA card in PCMCIA slot #0 and the ATA card  
containing the office data you wish to continue to use in PCMCIA slot #1.  
Turn on the power of the ATM Switch and start the boot monitor.  
3.  
4.  
Set the boot mode as follows:  
BOOT# SET boot flash_up  
End the boot monitor:  
5.  
BOOT# QUIT  
10-20  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifications  
Upgrading Software  
FLASH_UP_SAVE Mode  
Load the software from the ATA card mounted in the PCMCIA slot #0. The office  
data is loaded from the ATA card mounted in the PCMCIA slot #1. After loading,  
the office data is saved to the ATA card mounted in the PCMCIA slot #0.  
Figure 10-25: FLASH_UP_SAVE Mode  
Procedure  
Turn off the power of the ATM Switch.  
1.  
2.  
Insert the new version ATA card in PCMCIA slot #0 and the ATA card  
containing the office data you wish to continue to use in PCMCIA slot #1.  
Turn on the power of the ATM Switch and start the boot monitor.  
3.  
4.  
Set the boot mode as follows:  
BOOT# SET boot flash_up_save  
End the boot monitor:  
5.  
BOOT# QUIT  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Software  
Modifications  
INITIALIZE Mode  
Load the software from the Ether network server connected via the LAN card  
mounted in the PCMCIA slot #1. The office data is included in the software in the  
initial setting status. The software and office data are not saved.  
Figure 10-26: INITIALIZE Mode  
Procedure  
Turn off the power of the ATM Switch.  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Insert into PCMCIA slot #1 the LAN card connected to the Ether network.  
Turn on the power of the ATM Switch and start the boot monitor.  
Set the IP address of the ATM Switch  
BOOT# SET local ***.***.***.***  
Set the server's IP address and boot file name.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
BOOT# SET server ***.***.***.*** *****.bootfiles  
Set the IP address of the default router.  
BOOT# SET route ***.***.***.***  
Set the boot mode as follows:  
BOOT# SET boot initialize  
End the boot monitor.  
BOOT# QUIT  
10-22  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifications  
Upgrading Software  
INITIALIZE_SAVE Mode  
Load the software from the Ether network server connected via the LAN card  
mounted in the PCMCIA slot #1. The office data is included in the software in the  
initial setting status. After loading, the software and office data are saved to the ATA  
card mounted in PCMCIA slot #0 and reloaded in the main memory.  
Figure 10-27: INITIALIZE_SAVE Mode  
Procedure  
Turn off the power of the ATM Switch.  
1.  
2.  
Insert into PCMCIA slot #0 the ATA card to which to save the software and  
into PCMCIA slot #1 the LAN card connected to the Ether network.  
Turn on the power of the ATM Switch and start the boot monitor.  
3.  
4.  
Set the IP address of the ATM Switch.  
BOOT# SET local ***.***.***.***  
Set the server's IP address and boot file name.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
BOOT# SET server ***.***.***.*** *****.bootfiles  
Set the IP address of the default router.  
BOOT# SET route ***.***.***.***  
Set the boot mode as follows:  
BOOT# SET boot initialize_save  
End the boot monitor.  
BOOT# QUIT  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Upgrading Software  
Modifications  
NETWORK Mode  
Load the software from the Ether network server connected via the LAN card  
mounted in the PCMCIA slot #1. The office data is loaded from the ATA cad  
mounted in PCMCIA slot #0. Software is not saved.  
Figure 10-28: NETWORK Mode  
Procedure  
Turn off the power of the ATM Switch.  
1.  
2.  
Insert into PCMCIA slot #0 the ATA card containing the office data you wish  
to continue to use and into PCMCIA slot #1 the LAN card connected to the  
Ether network.  
Turn on the power of the ATM Switch and start the boot monitor.  
3.  
4.  
Set the IP address of the ATM Switch.  
BOOT# SET local ***.***.***.***  
Set the server's IP address and boot file name.  
5.  
6.  
7.  
8.  
BOOT# SET server ***.***.***.*** *****.bootfiles  
Set the IP address of the default router.  
BOOT# SET route ***.***.***.***  
Set the boot mode as follows:  
BOOT# SET boot network  
End the boot monitor.  
BOOT# QUIT  
10-24  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifications  
Adding Line Cards  
Adding Line Cards  
This section describes the procedures for adding line cards to the line slots of the  
ATM Switch.  
Before adding line cards, have the following equipment ready.  
Preparation  
„
„
„
„
The additional line cards  
Communication cables for the additional line cards  
MAT (not necessary if one is already connected to the ATM Switch)  
RS-232C cross cable for connecting the MAT to the ATM Switch(not necessary  
if already connected)  
„
„
Phillips screw driver  
Antistatic kit and gloves  
Remove the front plate installed in the line card slot on the front side of the  
ATM Switch.  
Hardware Work  
1.  
Insert the additional line card in the line card slot of the ATM Switch.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Connect the communication cable for the additional line card to the line card.  
Connect the new communication cable to other hardware, such as router or  
terminal.  
Connect the RS-232C cross cable to the RS-232C connector on the front of  
the switch/CPU card in the lower right area of the front of the ATM Switch.  
5.  
6.  
Connect the other end of the RS-232C cross cable connected to the ATM  
Switch to the MAT.  
ATM  
and MAT  
Turn on the MAT's power switch.  
Setting the  
Switch  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Set the communication parameters. (refer to section 6)  
Check the ALARM LED or MAT monitor and make sure there is no error with  
the ATM Switch.  
Check the additional line card. For instructions on entering the commands, refer to  
"Line Interface Test" on page 7-19.  
Hardware Check  
of the Additional  
Line Card  
Set the system configuration data of the additional line card. For details on the  
commands, refer to the ATM Switch Command Manual.  
Setting System  
Configuration  
Data  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Adding Hardware  
Modifications  
Adding Hardware  
This section describes the procedures for increasing the number of input-output  
lines by connecting a number of ATM Switch units or an ATM Switch unit with  
other hardware.  
Although the number of lines accommodated can be increased by connecting a  
number of ATM Switch units, since the ATM Switch is not equipped with an  
interface dedicated to connections between units, the actual number of lines  
accommodated is the total number of lines less the number of lines between the  
units.  
Before expanding the ATM Switch connections, have the following equipment  
ready.  
Preparation  
„
„
The additional hardware: the ATM Switch or other hardware  
Line cards for connecting the hardware (not necessary if you plan to use line  
cards already installed)  
„
Cables for connecting the hardware: cables meeting the line cards (not  
necessary if you plan to use cables already connected)  
„
„
MAT (not necessary if one is already connected to the ATM Switch)  
RS-232C cross cable for connecting the MAT to the ATM Switch: 1 cable (not  
necessary if already connected)  
„
„
Phillips screw driver  
Antistatic kit and gloves  
If the additional hardware is the ATM Switch, refer to this manual. If the additional  
hardware is not an ATM Switch, refer to the manual on that hardware.  
Setting the New  
ATM Switch  
10-26  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Modifications  
Adding Hardware  
When connecting two or more ATM Switch units or an ATM Switch unit with other  
hardware, it is necessary to synchronize the units by designating them as a master  
or slave. In addition, it is possible to set designated lines to transmit data according  
to the clock received by the line (loop time).  
Hardware Work  
Designating the ATM Switch as Master  
When an ATM Switch unit is designated as the master, the transmission data from  
all the line cards installed in its slots are output in sync with the self-running clock  
generated within the hardware.  
Centillion 1200N  
Centillion 1200N  
Figure 10-29: Example of Adding Hardware (ATM Switch: Master)  
Designating the ATM Switch as Slave  
The ATM Switch may be designated as a “slave” switch. The command SET  
clock slavedesignates a port as the slave port; a clock is derived from the  
signal on this receive port and the onboard clock is synchronized or phase-lock  
looped to it. From this, all transmit ports are subsequently clocked. Only ports in  
slots 0 or 1 (ports 00-13) may be slave ports. No ports on a TAXI interface card  
may be used as a slave port.  
SET looptime, which is a port specific, slave clocking command, has priority  
regardless of whether the switch is set to master or slave. Set looptime slaves the  
transmit port to the adjacent receive port instead of the internal clock.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
10-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Adding Hardware  
Modifications  
Centillion 1200N  
Centillion 1200N  
Figure 10-30: Example of Adding Hardware (ATM Switch: Slave)  
Centillion 1200N  
Figure 10-31: Example of Adding Hardware (When Looptime is  
Specified)  
Setting Configuration Data  
To set the clock mode of the ATM Switch, refer to the SET clockcommand in  
the Command Manual. To set the loop time, refer the SET looptimecommand  
in the Command Manual.  
For other hardware, refer to the appropriate manual(s) for the other hardware.  
10-28  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11  
Troubleshooting  
This chapter describes error detection and troubleshooting of the ATM Switch.  
Error Detection  
This section describes how the ATM Switch detects errors.  
When a problem occurs, it is automatically detected. Problems are automatically  
detected in the blocks shown below:  
„
„
„
„
Switch/CPU card  
Line cards  
Fan unit  
Power unit  
When a problem occurs in ATM Switch, error information is sent from the  
hardware to software. The alarm management unit in the software compiles this  
information and registers it in an alarm management table.  
If an alarm for the hardware or line interface alarm is detected, the ALARM LED  
on the ATM Switch will light up. If an external device is connected to the ALARM  
OUT connector, the device is also activated.  
The error information can be verified by entering a command (DISPLAY alarm,  
DISPLAY line) from the MAT.  
It is also possible to detect alarms with a diagnosis program.  
When the power unit is redundant and one of the power units is turned off,  
ALARM LED will light. This is not an error. ALARM LED will turn off when  
both power units are turned on.  
NOTE  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
11-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Error Detection  
Troubleshooting  
Hardware alarms and line interface alarms are indicated by the LED on the main  
unit. The status of the hardware and the status of the lines are also indicated.  
Detection by LED  
Each LED is described in Figure 11-1.  
Figure 11-1: ATM Switch LED Locations  
POWER LED  
The POWER LED lights green when power is on and turns off when power is  
off.  
READY LED  
The READY LED turns on when the equipment is operating properly and turns  
off when an error occurs. It also flashes during diagnosis.  
11-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting  
Error Detection  
ALARM LED  
The ALARM LED lights red when an error occurs in the equipment.  
The ALARM lamp flashes if an error occurs when the equipment is being  
booted. In this case, the cause of the fault may be determined by the number of  
times the lamp flashes.  
Flash Count  
Error  
1
2
3
4
5
6
ROM check sum  
SKM G/A register check  
Super I/O register check  
DRAM memory check  
Serial register check  
Serial loopback  
RCV, INS (LEDs on line cards)  
Available for each line, these lamps indicate the status of that particular line.  
RCV (red)  
Off  
INS (green)  
Lighted  
Off  
Status  
Line status normal  
Line error (reception error)  
Line error (transmission error)  
Hardware error  
Lighted  
Off  
Flashing  
Off  
Off  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
11-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error Detection  
Troubleshooting  
The diagnosis program can be started by the following processes:  
Detection by  
Diagnosis  
„
„
„
Power on reset  
Switch/CPU card reset  
Diagnosis command  
When the diagnosis is no good, the error information can be verified by executing  
the DISPLAY statusor DISPLAY alarmcommands.  
11-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
When the ALARM LED lights red while operating the ATM Switch, follow the  
instructions below:  
When ALARM  
LED is Lighted  
(Hardware Error)  
Connect the MAT to the ATM Switch. (See "Physical Connection of MAT"  
on page 9-3.)  
1.  
1.  
2.  
Turn on the MAT's power and set its communication parameters. (See "Setting  
the MAT" on page 9-6.)  
Enter the DISPLAY alarmcommand from the MAT. The command should  
be entered as follows:  
DISPLAY alarm[RETURN]  
Response will be output. Determine the error and take the necessary action.  
(See "Error Messages" on page 11-11.)  
3.  
4.  
Disconnect the MAT from the ATM Switch.  
Example of Responses  
Hardware Alarm  
96.03.10 20:11:48 - Environment000001  
96.03.12 12:33:21 - FAN 0  
96.02.22 08:47:38 - FAN 1  
96.02.07 15:56:08 - Power Unit 0  
96.02.08 12:36:15 - CPUDiagnosis NG070002  
96.10.13 21:02:40 - SwitchClock Alarm010002  
96.03.24 05:32:20 - Line Board 0 Clock Alarm000001  
96.07.18 02:03:49 - Line Card 0 OC3c/STM-1(MMF)Path Alarm010001  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
11-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Troubleshooting  
Alarm Error  
Numbers  
Alarm Error Number (Environment)  
Alarm No.  
Nature of Error  
POWER alarm  
FAN alarm  
-
-
000001  
Abnormal rise in environmental temperature  
Alarm Error Number (Switch/CPU Card Error)  
Alarm Type, Number  
Diagnosis NG 070002  
Diagnosis NG 050005  
Part  
Nature of Error  
MEMORY Memory diagnosis NG  
SAR  
SC  
SC  
BF  
BF  
BF  
BF  
ES  
ES  
ES  
ES  
ES  
ES  
ES  
ES  
D/I  
ES  
ES  
SC  
BF  
D/I  
SAR register NG  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
020002  
020003  
030001  
030002  
030003  
030103  
040001  
040002  
040004  
040006  
040101  
040102  
040104  
040106  
060004  
Cell alignment signal error  
BMT parity error  
Regression enable match error  
Regression clear match error  
BF0 parity error  
BF1 parity error  
ES0 Up side sync error  
ES0 Down side sync error  
ES0 port A FIFO overflow  
ES0 port B FIFO overflow  
ES1 Up side sync error  
ES1 Down side sync error  
ES1 port A FIFO overflow  
ES1 port B FIFO overflow  
Header conversion table parity error  
ES0 diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG 040007  
Diagnosis NG 040107  
Diagnosis NG 020004  
Diagnosis NG 030004  
Diagnosis NG 060010  
ES1 diagnosis NG  
SC diagnosis NG  
BF diagnosis NG  
DI diagnosis NG  
11-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Alarm Error Number (Line Buffer)  
Alarm Type, Number  
Control Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Part  
000001 BUFF  
040001 BUFF  
040007 BUFF  
050001 BUFF  
050002 BUFF  
050003 BUFF  
040008 IBC  
040009 IBC  
040010 IBC  
040011 IBC  
040012 OBC  
040013 OBC  
040014 OBC  
040015 OBC  
Nature of Error  
Illegal interruption  
Received cell parity error  
Illegal cell transmission error  
HT SGRAM test error  
Control Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
RIRO SGRAM test error  
RIRO SRAM test error  
IBC diagnosis NG  
Path Alarm  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
IBC RIRO SGRAM diagnosis NG  
IBC HT SGRAM diagnosis NG  
IBC RIRO SRAM diagnosis NG  
OBC diagnosis NG  
OBC Cell Buff diagnosis NG  
OBC HTM diagnosis NG  
OBC BCT/BMT diagnosis NG  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
11-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Troubleshooting  
Alarm Error Number (Line Card: OC-3c/STM-1)  
Alarm Type, Number  
Part  
010001 PHY  
010101 PHY  
010201 PHY  
010301 PHY  
020002 MUX  
030001 MUX  
640000 MUX  
010002 PHY  
010102 PHY  
010202 PHY  
010302 PHY  
Nature of Error  
Path Alarm  
PHY0 reception FIFO overflow  
PHY1 reception FIFO overflow  
PHY2 reception FIFO overflow  
PHY3 reception FIFO overflow  
50 MHz clock interruption  
UTOPIA parity error  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Clock Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
MUX diagnosis NG  
PHY0 diagnosis NG  
PHY1 diagnosis NG  
PHY2 diagnosis NG  
PHY3 diagnosis NG  
Alarm Error Number (Line Card: TAXI)  
Alarm type, No.  
Path Alarm  
Part  
020001 MUX  
020002 MUX  
020003 MUX  
020004 MUX  
130001 TAC  
130101 TAC  
130201 TAC  
130301 TAC  
Nature of error  
UTOPIA level 2 parity error  
50 MHz clock interruption  
12.5 MHz clock interruption  
Input 8 KHz clock interruption  
TAC0 diagnosis NG  
Clock Alarm  
Clock Alarm  
Clock Alarm  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
TAC1 diagnosis NG  
TAC2 diagnosis NG  
TAC3 diagnosis NG  
11-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Alarm Error Number (Line Card: 6.3M-J2)  
Alarm Type, Number  
Path Alarm  
Part  
020001 MUX  
020002 MUX  
Nature of Error  
TX UTOPIA level 2 parity error  
Clock Alarm  
TX UTOPIA level 2 operation clock  
interruption  
Clock Alarm  
Clock Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
020005 MUX  
020006 MUX  
030001 CFAD  
030002 CFAD  
Transmission clock interruption  
PLO transmission clock interruption  
UCFAD reception FIFO overflow  
UCFAD transmission FIFO  
overflow  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
150001 LCA  
150002 LCA  
160001 CFAD  
LCA Common diagnosis NG  
LCA Separate diagnosis NG  
UCFAD2 diagnosis NG  
Alarm Error Number (Line Card: DS3 and E3)  
Alarm Type, Number  
Path Alarm  
Part  
020001 MUX  
020002 MUX  
060007 MUX  
060008 MUX  
060001 MUX  
Nature of Error  
UTOPIA level 2 parity error  
50 MHz clock interruption  
UTOPIA level 1 parity error #0  
UTOPIA level 1 parity error #1  
Input 8KHz clock interruption  
Clock Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Clock Alarm  
Path Alarm  
080001 FRAMER FRAMER#0 reception FIFO  
underflow  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
Path Alarm  
080002 FRAMER FRAMER#0 reception FIFO  
overflow  
080003 FRAMER FRAMER#0 transmission FIFO  
overflow  
080101 FRAMER FRAMER#1 reception FIFO  
underflow  
080102 FRAMER FRAMER#1 reception FIFO  
overflow  
080103 FRAMER FRAMER#1 transmission FIFO  
overflow  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
Diagnosis NG  
060003 PLD  
PLD diagnosis NG  
080004 FRAMER FRM0 diagnosis NG  
080104 FRAMER FRM1 diagnosis NG  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
11-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Troubleshooting  
The RCV/INS LED is available for each line to indicate the status of that line. Refer  
to "Line Error Definition" on page 11-12 for lighting patterns.  
When RCV/INS is  
Lighted (Line  
Error)  
When the RCV/INS LED indicates an alarm for that line during the operation of  
the ATM Switch, follow the instructions below:  
Connect the MAT to the ATM Switch. (See "Physical Connection of MAT"  
on page 9-3.)  
1.  
2.  
3.  
Turn on the MAT's power and set its communication parameters. (See "Setting  
the MAT" on page 9-6.)  
Enter the line interface display command, DISPLAY linefrom the MAT.  
The command should be entered as follows:  
DISPLAY line[RETURN]  
Response will be output. Determine the error and take the necessary action.  
(See "Error Messages" on page 11-11.)  
4.  
5.  
Disconnect the MAT from the ATM Switch.  
Example of Responses  
Line Line status  
Hardware status Loop back  
00  
01  
02  
20  
30  
GOOD  
GOOD  
Loss of Signal  
AIS_Path  
Loss of Pointer  
normal  
normal  
failure  
failure  
failure  
local  
local  
local  
normal  
normal  
11-10  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Error Messages  
Message  
Meaning  
GOOD  
Functioning properly  
Loss of Signal  
Loss of Frame  
Out of Frame  
Signal interruption occurred  
Frame is out of sync  
Frame end can not be detected  
Section layer AIS received  
Path layer AIS received  
Section layer remote alarm received  
Path layer remote alarm received  
Cell is out of sync  
AIS_Section  
AIS_Path  
Yellow_Section  
Yellow_Path  
Loss of Cell Delineation  
Loss of Pointer  
Alarm Indication Signal  
Remote Alarm Indication  
Payload All One  
STS frame pointer error  
AIS received  
Remote alarm received  
Payload in transmission frame is all “1” (main  
signal all “1”)  
IDLE  
IDLE signal is being received  
Yellow Alarm  
PLCP_Yellow  
PLCP_LOF  
PLCP_OOF  
Admin down  
Yellow alarm signal is being received  
PLCP layer yellow signal is being received  
PLCP layer frame is out of sync  
PLCP layer frame end can not be detected  
This port has been put out of service by "set line  
status" command  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
11-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting Procedures  
Troubleshooting  
Line Error  
Definition  
Line  
Type  
Nature of Error  
Loss of Signal  
LED Pattern  
OC3  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
OC3  
Loss of Frame  
OC3  
Section AIS  
OC3  
Path AIS  
OC3  
Loss of Pointer  
Loss of Cell Delineation  
Yellow Section  
Yellow Path  
OC3  
OC3  
INS flashing, RCV off  
INS flashing, RCV off  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS flashing, RCV off  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS flashing, RCV off  
INS off, RCV on  
INS off, RCV on  
INS flashing, RCV off  
OC3  
TAXI  
Loss of Signal  
TAXI  
Loss of Cell Delineation  
Loss of Signal  
6.3M  
6.3M  
Alarm Indication Signal  
Loss of Frame  
6.3M  
6.3M  
Payload All One  
Loss of Cell Delineation  
Remote Alarm Indication  
Loss of Signal  
6.3M  
6.3M  
DS3/E3  
DS3/E3  
DS3/E3  
DS3/E3  
DS3/E3  
DS3/E3  
DS3/E3  
DS3/E3  
DS3/E3  
DS3/E3  
Loss of Frame  
Out of Frame  
Alarm Indication Signal  
IDLE  
Loss of Cell Delineation  
Yellow Alarm  
PLCP_LOF  
PLCP_OOF  
PLCP_Yellow  
11-12  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A
Specifications and Standards  
Specifications  
The Centillion 1200N is a 2.5 Gbps Switch.  
Item  
Description  
Switch  
Switch Configuration  
„
Input-output buffer type  
Switch Capacity  
„
2.5 Gbps = 622 Mbps × 4 (155 Mbps × 16)  
Buffer  
„
„
Input buffer:  
Output buffer:  
32K cells/line card  
32K cells/line card  
Cell Delay  
„
40  
(excluding cell delay upon cell competition in the buffer)  
µsec  
Control System  
Control Processor  
„
Built-in 64-bit RISC processor (VR4300/100 MHz)  
VPI/VCI Bits  
„
VPI+VCI total of 14 bits/line  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
Specifications and Standards  
Simultaneously Established Channels  
„
„
„
„
P-to-P PVC:  
8K connection (including multipoint PVC)/hardware  
1K endpoint/hardware  
Multipoint PVC:  
P-to-P SVC:  
1K connection (including multipoint SVC)/hardware  
1K endpoint/hardware  
Multipoint SVC:  
PVC Setting Method  
„
Established according to the fixed path information in the PCMCIA ATA card  
(or downloaded from external source)  
SVC Signaling Method  
„
ATM Forum UNI 3.0, 3.1, 4.0, Ver. 1.0  
NMS Interface  
„
SNMP  
OAM Cell  
„
„
Loopback cell control  
RDI/AIS cell control  
Traffic Control  
Policing Control  
„
Dual Leaky Bucket method UPC (1K connection/line)  
Congestion Control  
„
„
ABR  
EPD  
Priority Control  
„
„
Cell loss priority control: 2 classes  
Cell delay priority control: 5 classes  
Traffic/Performance Monitoring  
„
Counts passing/error cells for each line.  
Item  
Description  
A-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Standards  
Specifications  
Line  
Maximum Line Speed  
„
622 Mbps/line  
Number of ATM Line Slots  
„
4 slots (hot-swappable; can be inserted or removed live)  
Types of Lines Accommodated  
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
622M OC-12c STM4 (SMF)  
SC connector  
155M OC-3c/STM-1 (MMF)  
SC connector  
155M OC-3c/STM-1 (SMF-SR)  
SC connector  
155M OC-3c/STM-1 (SMF-LR)  
SC connector  
155M STS-3/STM-1 (UTP-5)  
RJ connector  
155M STS-3/STM-1 (COAX)  
BNC connector  
100M TAXI (MMF)  
SC connector  
6.3M J2  
‰
1 line/card  
1 line/card  
4 lines/card  
1 line/card  
4 lines/card  
2 lines/card  
4 lines/card  
1 line/card  
2 lines/card  
2 lines/card  
1 line/card  
4 lines/card  
4 lines/card  
4 lines/card  
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
‰
BNC connector  
45M DS3  
‰
BNC connector  
34M E3  
‰
BNC connector  
1.5M Primary  
‰
RJ connector  
1.5M DS1  
‰
RJ connector  
2M E1  
‰
RJ connector  
1.5M CE-DS1  
‰
RJ connector  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications and Standards  
„
LANE/ARP  
Server  
Mounting  
External Dimensions (width × depth × height)  
„
17.3 in. (440 mm) × 16.1 in. (410 mm) × 6.1 in. (154 mm, including rubber  
footing  
„
Can be mounted on a standard 19-inch rack  
Weight  
„
44.2 lb. (20 Kg)  
Power Supply  
„
Input:  
DC -40 to -58V  
Power Consumption  
„
Maximum 6.0A (DC -48V)  
Operating Noise  
„
Less than 50dB  
Cooling Method  
„
Forced air cooling  
Environmental Conditions  
„
„
Operating temperature:  
Operating humidity:  
41~104°F (5~40°C)  
10~80%  
A-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications and Standards  
Standards - Operational  
Standards - Operational  
Safety Standards  
UL1950  
(United States)  
(Canada)  
CSA-C22.2 No.950  
EN60950  
(Europe)  
AS3260, AUSTEL TS001  
EMI  
(Australia)  
FCC Part15, Class A  
(United States)  
(Europe)  
EN55022, Class A and B  
VCCI Type 1  
(Japan)  
EMS  
EN61000-2, ESD up to 8kV  
EN61000-3, RFI 3V/m  
EN61000-4, Electrical Fast Transients, level 2  
Power, Environmental Conditions  
IEC555-2, Power Factor Correction  
IEC555-3, AC Input Transients  
Audible noise IS07779 paragraph 7, max. 50dBA  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Standards - Functional  
Specifications and Standards  
Standards - Functional  
The Centillion 1200N is a 2.5 Gbps Switch. It conforms to the standards and  
recommendations listed below:  
(ATM Forum “ATM User-Network Interface Specification” Version3.0/3.1/4.0.)  
ITU-T (formerly  
CCITT) Broadband  
ISDN-related Recommendations  
Physical layer / electrical interface characteristics  
SDH Speed  
G.703a  
G.707  
G.708  
Basic Structure of SDH Frame  
Detailed Structure of SDH Frame  
G.709  
G.782  
Types and General Characteristics of SDH Multiplexing  
Device  
G.783  
G.804  
G.803  
I.113  
I.121  
I.150  
I.211  
I.311  
I.321  
I.327  
I.35B  
I.361  
I.362  
I.363  
I.364  
I.371  
I.413  
I.414  
Characteristics of SDH Multiplexing Device  
ATM Cell Mapping to PDH  
Transmission Network Architecture  
B-ISDN Terminology  
Basic Principles of B-ISDN  
Characteristics of B-ISDN ATM Functions  
B-ISDN Services  
Signaling Principles of the Network Side of B-ISDN  
B-ISDN Protocol Referral Model and its Application  
Functional Structure of B-ISDN  
ATM Layer Cell Transfer Function of B-ISDN  
ATM Layer Specifications of B-ISDN  
AAL Layer Functions of B-ISDN  
AAL Layer Specifications of B-ISDN  
B-ISDN Broadband Connectionless Service  
Traffic Control and Congestion Control in B-ISDN  
B-ISDN User-Network Interface  
Concept of Recommendation on B-ISDN and on Layer  
1 in User Access of B-ISDN  
I.432  
Specifications of User Interface Layer 1 of B-ISDN  
OAM Principles of B-ISDN  
I.610  
Q.2931  
B-ISDN Signaling Layer 3  
Q.2100  
Outline of AAL Layer for B-ISDN Signaling  
(formerly Q.SAAL0)  
Q.2110  
AAL Layer SSCOP for B-ISDN Signaling  
(formerly Q.SAAL1)  
Q.2130  
AAL Layer SSCF for Signaling in UNI of B-ISDN  
(formerly Q.SAAL2)  
A-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Glossary  
AAC  
A
Actual Allocated Capacity  
AAL  
ATM Adaptation Layer: The standards layer that allows multiple applications to  
have data converted to and from the ATM cell. A protocol used that translates  
higher layer services into the size and format of an ATM cell.  
AAL Connection  
Association established by the AAL between two or more next higher layer entities.  
AAL-1  
ATM Adaptation Layer Type 1: AAL functions in support of constant bit rate, time-  
dependent traffic such as voice and video.  
AAL-2  
ATM Adaptation Layer Type 2: This AAL is still undefined by the International  
Standards bodies. It is a placeholder for variable bit rate video transmission.  
AAL-3/4  
ATM Adaptation Layer Type 3/4: AAL functions in support of variable bit rate,  
delay-tolerant data traffic requiring some sequencing and/or error detection  
support. Originally two AAL types, i.e. connection-oriented and connectionless,  
which have been combined.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Glossary  
AAL-5  
ATM Adaptation Layer Type 5: AAL functions in support of variable bit rate, delay-  
tolerant connection-oriented data traffic requiring minimal sequencing or error  
detection support.  
AALP  
Audible Alarm Panel  
ABR  
Available Bit Rate: ABR is an ATM layer service category for which the limiting  
ATM layer transfer characteristics provided by the network may change subsequent  
to connection establishment. A flow control mechanism is specified which supports  
several types of feedback to control the source rate in response to changing ATM  
layer transfer characteristics. It is expected that an end-system that adapts its traffic  
in accordance with the feedback will experience a low cell loss ratio and obtain a  
fair share of the available bandwidth according to a network specific allocation  
policy. Cell delay variation is not controlled in this service, although admitted cells  
are not delayed unnecessarily.  
AC  
Alternating Current  
ACH  
Act Change  
ACI  
Active Cell Indication  
ACK  
Acknowledgmen  
ACM  
Address Complete Message: A BISUP call control message from the receiving  
exchange to sending exchange indicating the completion of address information.  
B-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
ACR  
Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio: One of the factors that limits the distance a signal  
may be sent through a given media. ACR is the ratio of the power of the received  
signal, attenuated by the media, over the power of the NEXT crosstalk from the  
local transmitter, usually expressed in decibels (db). To achieve a desired bit error  
rate, the received signal power must usually be several times larger than the NEXT  
power or plus several db. Increasing a marginal ACR may decrease the bit error  
rate.  
ACR  
Allowed Cell Rate: An ABR service parameter, ACR is the current rate in cells/sec  
at which a source is allowed to send.  
ACSE  
Association Control Service Element  
ACT  
Applied Computer Technologies: A Hewlett Packard’s program that is a strategy  
and set of open architecture commands and interfaces for integrating voice and  
database technologies. The idea is that with ACT a call will arrive at the telephone  
simultaneously with the database record of the caller.  
Address Filter  
Address Prefix  
A string of 0 or more bits up to a maximum of 152 bits that is the lead portion of  
one or more ATM addresses.  
Address Resolution  
Address Resolution is the procedure by which a client associates a LAN destination  
with the ATM address of another client or the BUS.  
Adjacency  
The relationship between two communicating neighboring peer nodes.  
Administrative Domain  
A collection of managed entities grouped for administrative reasons.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
ADPCM  
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation: A reduced bit rate variant of PCM  
audio encoding (see also PCM). This algorithm encodes the difference between an  
actual audio sample amplitude and a predicted amplitude and adapts the resolution  
based on recent differential values.  
ADTF  
ACR Decrease Time Factor: This is the time permitted between sending RM-cells  
before the rate is decreased to ICR (Initial Cell Rate). The ADTF range is 0.01 to  
10.23 sec. with granularity of 10 ms.  
AFI  
Authority and Format Identifier: This identifier is part of the network level address  
header.  
Agent  
Acts on behalf of another person or thing, with delegated authority. The agents  
goals are those of the entity that created it.  
Aggregation Token  
A number assigned to an outside link by the border nodes at the ends of the outside  
link. The same number is associated with all uplinks and induced uplinks associated  
with the outside link. In the parent and all higher-level peer group, all uplinks with  
the same aggregation token are aggregated.  
AHFG  
ATM-attached Host Functional Group: The group of functions performed by an  
ATM-attached host that is participating in the MPOA service.  
AI  
Artificial Intelligence: Perhaps the next phase of computing. The present form of  
IA in computer software are called Expert or Knowledge Based systems.  
AI  
Signaling ID assigned by Exchange A.  
AIM  
ATM Inverse Multiplexer: A term discontinued because of conflict with an  
established product. Refer to AIMUX.  
B-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
AIMUX  
ATM Inverse Multiplexing: A device that allows multiple T1 or E1  
communications facilities to be combined into a single broadband facility for the  
transmission of ATM cells.  
AIR  
Additive Increase Rate: An ABR service parameter, AIR controls the rate at which  
the cell transmission rate increases. It is signaled as AIRF, where AIRF =  
AIR*Nrm/PCR.  
AIRF  
Additive Increase Rate Factor: Refer to AIR.  
AIS  
Alarm Indication Signal: An all ones signal sent down or up stream by a device  
when it detects an error condition or receives an error condition or receives an error  
notification from another unit in the transmission path.  
Alternate Routing  
A mechanism that supports the use of a new path after an attempt to set up a  
connection along a previously selected path fails.  
ALT  
Alternative Access Providers to the local telephone network i.e., Teleport.  
AMI  
Alternative Mark Inversion: The line-coding format in T-1 transmission systems  
whereby successive tones (marks) are alternately inverted (sent with polarity  
opposite that of the preceding mark).  
Ancestor Node  
A logical group node that has a direct parent relationship to a given node (i.e., it is  
the parent of that node, or the parent's parent...).  
ANI  
Automatic Number Identification: A charge number parameter that is normally  
included in the Initial Address Message to the succeeding carrier for billing  
purposes.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
ANM  
Answer Message: A BISUP call control message from the receiving exchange to  
the sending exchange indicating answer and that a through connection should be  
completed in both directions.  
ANSI  
American National Standards Institute: A U.S. standards body.  
API  
Application Program Interface: A programming interface used for interprogram  
communications or for interfacing between protocol layers.  
API_connection  
Native ATM Application Program Interface Connection: API_connection is a  
relationship between an API_endpoint and other ATM devices that has the  
following characteristics:  
•
Data communication may occur between the API_endpoint and the other ATM  
devices comprising the API_connection  
•
Each API_connection may occur over a duration of time only once; the same  
set of communicating ATM devices may form a new connection after a prior  
connection is released  
•
The API_connection may be presently active (able to transfer data), or merely  
anticipated for the future  
APPN  
Advanced Peer to Peer Network: IBM network architecture for building dynamic  
routing across arbitrary network topologies. Intended as an eventual replacement  
for SNA, IBM's static routed, hierarchical network architecture.  
ARE  
All Routes Explorer: A specific frame initiated by a source which is sent on all  
possible routes in Source Route Bridging.  
ARP  
Address Resolution Protocol: The procedures and messages in a communications  
protocol which determines which physical network address (MAC) corresponds to  
the IP address in the packet.  
B-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
ARPANet  
Advanced Research Projects Agency NETwork: A Department of Defense data  
network, developed by ARPA, which ties together many users and computers in  
universities, government, and businesses. ARPANET has been the forerunner of  
many developments in commercial data communications, including packet  
switching, which was first tested on a large scale on the network. ARPANET is a  
predcessor of the Internet. It was started in 1969 with funds for the Defense  
1
Department’s Advanced Projects Research Agency.  
ASP  
Abstract Service Primitive: An implementation-independent description of an  
interaction between a service-user and a service-provider at a particular service  
boundary, as defined by Open Systems Interconnection (OSI).  
Assigned Cell  
Cell that provides a service to an upper layer entity or ATM Layer Management  
entity (ATMM-entity).  
ASW  
Cell switching control (point-to-point connection, point-to-multipoint connection)  
Asynchronous  
Not occurring at the same time; beginning each operation only after finishing the  
preceding one.  
Asynchronous Time Division Multiplexing  
A multiplexing technique in which a transmission capability is organized in a prior  
unassigned time slots. The time slots are assigned to cells upon request of each  
application's instantaneous real need.  
ATM  
Asynchronous Transfer Mode: A transfer mode in which the information is  
organized into cells. It is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of cells  
containing information from an individual user is not necessarily periodic. ATM is  
a high bandwidth, low-delay, connection-oriented, packet-like switching and  
multiplexing technique which will form the basis for future offering of Broadband  
ISDN(B-ISDN).Usable capacity is segmented into 53-byte fixed-size cells,  
consisting of header and information fields, allocated to services on demand.  
1.Newton’s Telecom Dictionary  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
ATM Address  
Defined in the UNI Specification as 3 formats, each having 20 bytes in length  
including country, area and end-system identifiers.  
ATM Layer Link  
A section of an ATM Layer connection between two adjacent active ATM Layer  
entities (ATM-entities).  
ATM Link  
A virtual path link (VPL) or a virtual channel link (VCL).  
ATM-NIC  
ATM Network Interface Card: Electronic circuitry connecting a workstation to a  
network.Usually a card that fits into one of the expansion slots inside a personal  
computer.It works with the network software and computer operating system to  
transmit and receive messages on the network.  
ATM Peer-to-Peer Connection  
A virtual channel connection (VCC) or a virtual path connection (VPC).  
ATM Switch  
A generic term usually referring to an ATM switching system rather than a  
switching element. ATM switches are generally hardware based, self-routing, and  
high speed (up to Gbit/s).  
ATM-TA  
ATM Terminal Adapter: The terminal adapter is a protocol converter (little black  
box) that adapts PCs, workstations and other equipment to the peculiar world of  
ISDN.  
ATM Traffic Descriptor  
A generic list of traffic parameters that can be used to capture the intrinsic traffic  
characteristics of a requested ATM connection.  
ATM User-User Connection  
An association established by the ATM Layer to support communication between  
two or more ATM service users (i.e., between two or more next higher entities or  
between two or more ATM-entities). The communications over an ATM Layer  
connection may be either bidirectional or unidirectional. The same Virtual Channel  
Identifier (VCI) issued for both directions of a connection at an interface.  
B-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
B
ATS  
Abstract Test Suite: A set of abstract test cases for testing a particular protocol. An  
"executable" test suite may be derived from an abstract test suite.  
Attenuation  
The process of the reduction of the power of a signal as it passes through most  
media. Usually proportional to distance, attenuation is sometimes the factor that  
limits the distance a signal may be transmitted through a media before it can no  
longer be received.  
AUSTEL  
Australian Telecommunications Authority: This organization is responsible for  
regulating telecommunications and radio communications, including promoting  
industry self-regulation and managing the rediofrequency spectrum. It also has  
1
significant consumer protection responsibilities.  
Autonomous  
Not subject to the rule or authority of another.  
B
BBC  
Broadband Bearer Capability: A bearer class field that is part of the initial address  
message.  
BCD  
Binary Coded Decimal: A form of coding of each octet within a cell where each bit  
has one of two allowable states, 1 or 0.  
BCI  
Broadcast Channel Identifier.  
BCOB  
Broadband Connection Oriented Bearer: Information in the SETUP message that  
indicates the type of service requested by the calling user.  
1.ACA Home Page. 7 January 2000  
http://www.aca.gov.au/authority/aca.htm  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Glossary  
BCOB-A  
Bearer Class A: Indicated by ATM end user in SETUP message for connection-  
oriented, constant bit rate service. The network may perform internetworking based  
on AAL information element (IE).  
BCOB-C  
Bearer Class C: Indicated by ATM end user in SETUP message for connection-  
oriented, variable bit rate service. The network may perform internetworking based  
on AAL information element (IE).  
BCOB-X  
Bearer Class X: Indicated by ATM end user in SETUP message for ATM transport  
service where AAL, traffic type and timing requirements are transparent to the  
network.  
BECN  
Backward Explicit Congestion Notification: A Resource Management (RM) cell  
type generated by the network or the destination, indicating congestion or  
approaching congestion for traffic flowing in the direction opposite that of the  
BECN cell.  
BER  
Bit Error Rate: A measure of transmission quality. It is generally shown as a  
negative exponent, (e.g., 10-7 which means 1 out of 107 bits are in error or 1 out  
of 10,000,000 bits are in error).  
BHLI  
Broadband High Layer Information: This is a Q.2931 information element that  
identifies an application (or session layer protocol of an application).  
Bi  
Signaling ID assigned by Exchange B.  
B-ICI  
B-ISDN Inter-Carrier Interface: An ATM Forum defined specification for the  
interface between public ATM networks to support user services across multiple  
public carriers.  
B-10  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
B
B-ICI SAAL  
B-ICI Signaling ATM Adaptation Layer: A signaling layer that permits the transfer  
of connection control signaling and ensures reliable delivery of the protocol  
message. The SAAL is divided into a Service Specific part and a Common part  
(AAL5).  
BIP  
Bit Interleaved Parity: A method used at the PHY layer to monitor the error  
performance of the link. A check bit or word is sent in the link overhead covering  
the previous block or frame. Bit errors in the payload will be detected and may be  
reported as maintenance information.  
BIS  
Border Intermediate System.  
B-ISDN  
Broadband ISDN: A high-speed network standard (above 1.544 Mbps) that  
evolved Narrowband ISDN with existing and new services with voice, data and  
video in the same network.  
BISUP  
Broadband ISDN User's Part: A SS7 protocol which defines the signaling messages  
to control connections and services.  
B-LLI  
Broadband Low Layer Information: This is a Q.2931 information element that  
identifies a layer 2 and a layer 3 protocol used by the application.  
BMT  
Basic Mode Transmission  
BN  
Bridge Number: A locally administered bridge ID used in Source Route Bridging  
to uniquely identify a route between two LANs.  
BN  
BECN Cell: A Resource Management (RM) cell type indicator. A Backwards  
Explicit Congestion Notification (BECN) RM-cell may be generated by the  
network or the destination. To do so, BN=1 is set, to indicate the cell is not source-  
generated, and DIR=1 to indicate the backward flow. Source generated RM-cells  
are initialized with BN=0.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B
Glossary  
BNC  
Bayonet-Neill-Concelman: A bayonet-locking connector for slim coaxial cables,  
like those used with Ethernet.  
BOM  
Beginning of Message: An indicator contained in the first cell of an ATM  
segmented packet.  
Border Node  
A logical node that is in a specified peer group, and has at least one link that crosses  
the peer group boundary.  
BP  
Back Pressure: Propagation effects in a communications network of hop-by-hop  
flow control to upstream nodes.  
BPDU  
Bridge Protocol Data Unit: A message type used by bridges to exchange  
management and control information.  
BPP  
Bridge Port Pair (Source Routing Descriptor): Frame header information  
identifying a bridge/LAN pair of a Source route segment.  
Broadband  
A generic term referring to any network, traffic type or device providing or  
requiring a large amount of bandwidth. A service or system requiring transmission  
channels capable of supporting rates greater than the Integrated Services Digital  
Network (ISDN) primary rate.  
Broadband Access  
An ISDN access capable of supporting one or more broadband services.  
Broadcast  
Data transmission to all addresses or functions.  
BT  
Burst Tolerance: BT applies to ATM connections supporting VBR services and is  
the limit parameter of the GCRA.  
B-12  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
C
Btag  
Beginning Tag: A one octet field of the CPCS_PDU used in conjunction with the  
Etag octet to form an association between the beginning of message and end of  
message.  
B-TE  
Broadband Terminal Equipment: An equipment category for B-ISDN which  
includes terminal adapters and terminals.  
BUS  
Broadcast and Unknown Server: This server handles data sent by an LE Client to  
the broadcast MAC address ('FFFFFFFFFFFF'), all multicast traffic, and initial  
unicast frames which are sent by a LAN Emulation Client.  
BW  
Bandwidth: A numerical measurement of throughput of a system or network.  
C
CAC  
Connection Admission Control: Connection Admission Control is defined as the  
set of actions taken by the network during the call set- up phase (or during call re-  
negotiation phase) in order to determine whether a connection request can be  
accepted or should be rejected (or whether a request for re-allocation can be  
accommodated).  
Call  
A call is an association between two or more users or between a user and a network  
entity that is established by the use of network capabilities. This association may  
have zero or more connections.  
CAS  
Channel Associated Signaling: A form of circuit state signaling in which the circuit  
state is indicated by one or more bits of signaling status sent repetitively and  
associated with that specific circuit.  
CBDS  
Connectionless Broadband Data Service: A connectionless service similar to  
Bellcore's SMDS defined by European Telecommunications Standards Institute  
(ETSI).  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Glossary  
CBR  
Constant Bit Rate: An ATM service category which supports a constant or  
guaranteed rate to transport services such as video or voice as well as circuit  
emulation which requires rigorous timing control and performance parameters.  
CCITT  
Comite Consutarif International Telegraphique at Telephonique: The Consultive  
Committee on International Telegraph and Telephony.The CCIT is known as the  
ITU-T (International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Services  
Sector), based in Geneva Switzerland.The scope of its work is now much broader  
than just telegraphy and telephony.It now also includes telematics, data, new  
services, systems and networks (like ISDN).  
CCR  
Current Cell Rate: The Current Cell Rate is an RM-cell field set by the source to  
its current ACR when it generates a forward RM-cell. This field may be used to  
facilitate the calculation of ER, and may not be changed by network elements. CCR  
is formatted as a rate.  
CCS  
Common Channel Signaling: A form signaling in which a group of circuits share a  
signaling channel. Refer to SS7.  
CDF  
Cutoff Decrease Factor: CDF controls the decrease in ACR (Allowed Cell Rate)  
associated with CRM.  
CD-ROM  
Compact Disk-Read Only Memory: Used by a computer to store large amounts of  
data. Commonly used for interactive video games.  
CDV  
Cell Delay Variation: CDV is a component of cell transfer delay, induced by  
buffering and cell scheduling. Peak-to-peak CDV is a QoS delay parameter  
associated with CBR and VBR services. The peak-to- peak CDV is the ((1-a)  
quantile of the CTD) minus the fixed CTD that could be experienced by any  
delivered cell on a connection during the entire connection holding time. The  
parameter "a" is the probability of a cell arriving late. See CDVT.  
B-14  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
C
CDVT  
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance-ATM layer functions may alter the traffic  
characteristics of ATM connections by introducing Cell Delay Variation. When  
cells from two or more ATM connections are multiplexed, cells of a given ATM  
connection may be delayed while cells of another ATM connection are being  
inserted at the output of the multiplexer. Similarly, some cells may be delayed while  
physical layer overhead or OAM cells are inserted. Consequently, some  
randomness may affect the inter-arrival time between consecutive cells of a  
connection as monitored at the UNI. The upper bound on the "clumping" measure  
is the CDVT.  
CE  
Connection endpoint: A terminator at one end of a layer connection within a SAP.  
CEI  
Connection endpoint Identifier: Identifier of a CE that can be used to identify the  
connection at a SAP.  
Cell  
A unit of transmission in ATM. A fixed-size frame consisting of a 5-octet header  
and a 48-octet payload.  
Cell Header  
ATM Layer protocol control information.  
CER  
Cell Error Ratio: The ratio of errored cells in a transmission in relation to the total  
cells sent in a transmission. The measurement is taken over a time interval and is  
desirable to be measured on an in-service circuit.  
CES  
Circuit Emulation Service: The ATM Forum circuit emulation service  
interoperability specification specifies interoperability agreements for supporting  
Constant Bit Rate (CBR) traffic over ATM networks that comply with the other  
ATM Forum interoperability agreements. Specifically, this specification supports  
emulation of existing TDM circuits over ATM networks.  
CFAD  
Cell Frame Assembly/Disassembly  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Glossary  
Child Node  
A node at the next lower level of the hierarchy which is contained in the peer group  
represented by the logical group node currently referenced. This could be a logical  
group node, or a physical node.  
Child Peer Group  
A child peer group of a peer group is any one containing a child node of a logical  
group node in that peer group. A child peer group of a logical group node is the one  
containing the child node of that logical group node.  
CI  
Congestion Indicator: This is a field in a RM-cell, and is used to cause the source  
to decrease its ACR. The source sets CI=0 when it sends an RM-cell. Setting CI=1  
is typically how destinations indicate that EFCI has been received on a previous  
data cell.  
CIF  
Cells In Flight: An ABR service parameter, CIF is the negotiated number of cells  
that the network would like to limit the source to sending during idle startup period,  
before the first RM-cell returns. Range: 0-16,777,215  
CIP  
Carrier Identification Parameter: A 3 or 4 digit code in the initial address message  
identifying the carrier to be used for the connection.  
CIR  
Committed Information Rate: CIR is the information transfer rate which a network  
offering Frame Relay Services (FRS) is committed to transfer under normal  
conditions. The rate is averaged over a minimum increment of time.  
CISPR  
Comite International Special des Perturbations Radioelectriques  
CL  
Connectionless service: A service which allows the transfer of information among  
service subscribers without the need for end-to- end establishment procedures.  
CLK  
Clock: Generates system clock  
B-16  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
C
CLP  
Cell Loss Priority: This bit in the ATM cell header indicates two levels of priority  
for ATM cells. CLP=0 cells are higher priority than CLP=1 cells. CLP=1 cells may  
be discarded during periods of congestion to preserve the CLR of CLP=0 cells.  
CLR  
Cell Loss Ratio: CLR is a negotiated QoS parameter and acceptable values are  
network specific. The objective is to minimize CLR provided the end-system  
adapts the traffic to the changing ATM layer transfer characteristics. The Cell Loss  
Ratio is defined for a connection as: Lost Cells/Total Transmitted Cells. The CLR  
parameter is the value of CLR that the network agrees to offer as an objective over  
the lifetime of the connection. It is expressed as an order of magnitude, having a  
range of 10-1 to 10-15 and unspecified.  
CMIP  
Common Management Interface Protocol: An ITU-TSS standard for the message  
formats and procedures used to exchange management information in order to  
operate, administer maintain and provision a network.  
CMR  
Cell Misinsertion Rate: The ratio of cells received at an endpoint that were not  
originally transmitted by the source end in relation to the total number of cells  
properly transmitted.  
CNR  
Complex Node Representation: A collection of nodal state parameters that provide  
detailed state information associated with a logical node.  
COD  
Connection Oriented Data: Data requiring sequential delivery of its component  
PDUs to assure correct functioning of its supported application, (e.g., voice or  
video).  
COM  
Continuation of Message: An indicator used by the ATM Adaptation Layer to  
indicate that a particular ATM cell is a continuation of a higher layer information  
packet which has been segmented.  
Common Peer Group  
The lowest level peer group in which a set of nodes is represented. A node is  
represented in a peer group either directly or through one of its ancestors.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Glossary  
Communication endpoint  
An object associated with a set of attributes which are specified at the  
communication creation time.  
Concatenation  
Joining several fibers together end-to-end.  
Configuration  
The phase in which the LE Client discovers the LE Service.  
Connection  
An ATM connection consists of concatenation of ATM Layer links in order to  
provide an end-to-end information transfer capability to access points.  
Connection  
In switched virtual connection (SVC) environments the LAN Emulation  
Management entities set up connections between each other using UNI signaling.  
Connectionless  
Refers to ability of existing LANs to send data without previously establishing  
connections.  
Control Connections  
A Control VCC links the LEC to the LECS. Control VCCs also link the LEC to the  
LES and carry LE_ARP traffic and control frames. The control VCCs never carry  
data frames.  
Corresponding Entities  
Peer entities with a lower layer connection among them.  
CP  
Control Panel  
CPAD  
Character Packet Assembly/Disassembly  
CPCS  
Common Part Convergence Sublayer: The portion of the convergence sublayer of  
an AAL that remains the same regardless of the traffic type.  
B-18  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
C
CPCS-SDU  
Common Part Convergence Sublayer-Service Data Unit: Protocol data unit to be  
delivered to the receiving AAL layer by the destination CP convergence sublayer.  
CPE  
Customer Premises Equipment: End user equipment that resides on the customer's  
premise which may not be owned by the local exchange carrier.  
CPN  
Calling Party Number: A parameter of the initial address message that identifies  
the calling number and is sent to the destination carrier.  
CPU  
Central Processing Center: The "brian" of the computer.It manipulates data and  
processes instructions coming from software or a human operator.  
Crankback  
A mechanism for partially releasing a connection setup in progress which has  
encountered a failure. This mechanism allows PNNI to perform alternate routing.  
CRC  
Cyclic Redundancy Check: A mathematical algorithm that computes a numerical  
value based on the bits in a block of data. This number is transmitted with the data  
and the receiver uses this information and the same algorithm to insure the accurate  
delivery of data by comparing the results of algorithm and the number received. If  
a mismatch occurs, an error in transmission is presumed.  
CRF  
Cell Relay Function: This is the basic function that an ATM network performs in  
order to provide a cell relay service to ATM end-stations.  
CRF  
Connection Related Function: A term used by Traffic Management to reference a  
point in a network or a network element where per connection functions are  
occurring. This is the point where policing at the VCC or VPC level may occur.  
CRM  
Missing RM-cell count: CRM limits the number of forward RM-cells which may  
be sent in the absence of received backward RM-cells.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Glossary  
CRM  
Cell Rate Margin: This is a measure of the difference between the effective  
bandwidth allocation and the allocation for sustainable rate in cells per second.  
CRS  
Cell Relay Service: A carrier service which supports the receipt and transmission  
of ATM cells between end users in compliance with ATM standards and  
implementation specifications.  
CS  
Convergence Sublayer: The general procedures and functions that convert between  
ATM and non-ATM formats. This describes the functions of the upper half of the  
AAL layer. This is also used to describe the conversion functions between non-  
ATM protocols such as frame relay or SMDS and ATM protocols above the AAL  
layer.  
CSA  
Canadian Standard Association: A non-profit, independent organization which  
operates a listing service for electrical and electronic materials and equipment.  
CSU  
Channel Service Unit: An interface for digital leased lines which performs  
loopback testing and line conditioning.  
CT  
Conformance Test: Testing to determine whether an implementation complies with  
the specifications of a standard and exhibits the behaviors mandated by that  
standard.  
CTD  
Cell Transfer Delay: This is defined as the elapsed time between a cell exit event  
at the measurement point 1 (e.g., at the source UNI) and the corresponding cell  
entry event at measurement point 2 (e.g., the destination UNI) for a particular  
connection. The cell transfer delay between two measurement points is the sum of  
the total inter-ATM node transmission delay and the total ATM node processing  
delay.  
B-20  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
D
D
DA  
Destination Address: Information sent in the forward direction indicating the  
address of the called station or customer.  
DA  
Destination MAC Address: A six octet value uniquely identifying an endpoint and  
which is sent in IEEE LAN frame headers to indicate frame destination.  
Data Connections  
Data VCCs connect the LECs to each other and to the Broadcast and Unknown  
Server. These carry Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 or IEEE 802.5 data frames as well as flush  
messages.  
DCC  
Data Country Code: This specifies the country in which an address is registered.  
The codes are given in ISO 3166. The length of this field is two octets. The digits  
of the data country code are encoded in Binary Coded Decimal (BCD) syntax. The  
codes will be left justified and padded on the right with the hexadecimal value "F"  
to fill the two octets.  
DCE  
Data Communication Equipment: A generic definition of computing equipment  
that attaches to a network via a DTE.  
Default Node Representation  
A single value for each nodal state parameter giving the presumed value between  
any entry or exit to the logical node and the nucleus.  
Demultiplexing  
A function performed by a layer entity that identifies and separates SDUs from a  
single connection to more than one connection.  
DES  
Destination End Station: An ATM termination point which is the destination for  
ATM messages of a connection and is used as a reference point for ABR services.  
See SES.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D
Glossary  
Dijkstra's Algorithm  
An algorithm that is sometimes used to calculate routes given a link and nodal state  
topology database.  
DIR  
This is a field in an RM-cell which indicates the direction of the RM- cell with  
respect to the data flow with which it is associated. The source sets DIR=0 and the  
destination sets DIR=1.  
Direct Set  
A set of host interfaces which can establish direct layer two communications for  
unicast (not needed in MPOA).  
DLPI  
UNIX International, Data Link Provider Interface (DLPI) Specification: Revision  
2.0.0, OSI Work Group, August 1991.  
DMA  
Direct Memory Access: A fast method of moving data from a storage device or  
LAN interface card directly to RAM which speeds processing.  
Domain  
Refer to Administrative Domain.  
DS  
Distributed Single Layer Test Method: An abstract test method in which the upper  
tester is located within the system under test and the point of control and  
observation (PCO) is located at the upper service boundary of the Implementation  
Under Test (IUT) - for testing one protocol layer. Test events are specified in terms  
of the abstract service primitives (ASP) at the upper tester above the IUT and ASPs  
and/or protocol data units (PDU) at the lower tester PCO.  
DS-0  
Digital Signal, Level 0: The 64 kbps rate that is the basic building block for both  
the North American and European digital hierarchies.  
DS-1  
Digital Signal, Level 1: The North American Digital Hierarchy signaling standard  
for transmission at 1.544 Mbps. This standard supports 24 simultaneous DS-0  
signals. The term is often used interchangeably with T1 carrier although DS-1  
signals may be exchanged over other transmission systems.  
B-22  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
D
DS-2  
Digital Signal, Level 2: The North American Digital Hierarchy signaling standard  
for transmission of 6.312 Mbps that is used by T2 carrier which supports 96 calls.  
DS-3  
Digital Signal, Level 3: The North American Digital Hierarchy signaling standard  
for transmission at 44.736 Mbps that is used by T3 carrier. DS-3 supports 28 DS-  
1s plus overhead.  
DS3 PLCP  
Physical Layer Convergence Protocol: An alternate method used by older T carrier  
equipment to locate ATM cell boundaries. This method has recently been moved  
to an informative appendix of the ATM DS3 specification and has been replaced  
by the HEC method.  
DSE  
Distributed Single-Layer Embedded (Test Method): An abstract test method in  
which the upper tester is located within the system under test and there is a point  
of control and observation at the upper service boundary of the Implementation  
Under Test (IUT) for testing a protocol layer, or sublayer, which is part of a multi-  
protocol IUT.  
DSS2 Setup  
Digital Subscriber Signaling #2: ATM Broadband signaling.  
DSU  
Data Service Unit: Equipment used to attach users' computing equipment to a  
public network. Converts RS-232-C or other terminal interface to DSX-1  
interface.Also called Digital Service Unit.  
DTE  
Data Terminal Equipment: A generic definition of external networking interface  
equipment such as a modem.  
DTL  
Designated Transit List: A list of nodes and optional link IDs that completely  
specify a path across a single PNNI peer group.  
DTL Originator  
The first switching system within the entire PNNI routing domain to build the  
initial DTL stack for a given connection.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
Glossary  
DTL  
Terminator The last switching system within the entire PNNI routing domain to  
process the connection and thus the connection's DTL.  
DXI  
Data Exchange Interface: A variable length frame-based ATM interface between a  
DTE and a special ATM CSU/DSU. The ATM CSU/DSU converts between the  
variable-length DXI frames and the fixed-length ATM cells.  
E
E.164  
A public network addressing standard utilizing up to a maximum of 15 digits. ATM  
uses E.164 addressing for public network addressing.  
E1  
Also known as CEPT1, the 2.048 Mbps rate used by European CEPT carrier to  
transmit 30 64 kbps digital channels for voice or data calls, plus a 64 kbps signaling  
channel and a 64 kbps channel for framing and maintenance.  
E3  
Also known as CEPT3, the 34.368 Mbps rate used by European CEPT carrier to  
transmit 16 CEPT1s plus overhead.  
Edge Device  
A physical device which is capable of forwarding packets between legacy  
interworking interfaces (e.g., Ethernet, Token Ring, etc.) and ATM interfaces based  
on data-link and network layer information but which does not participate in the  
running of any network layer routing protocol. An Edge Device obtains forwarding  
descriptions using the route distribution protocol.  
EFCI  
Explicit Forward Congestion Indication: EFCI is an indication in the ATM cell  
header. A network element in an impending-congested state or a congested state  
may set EFCI so that this indication may be examined by the destination end-  
system. For example, the end- system may use this indication to implement a  
protocol that adaptively lowers the cell rate of the connection during congestion or  
impending congestion. A network element that is not in a congestion state or an  
impending congestion state will not modify the value of this indication. Impending  
congestion is the state when a network equipment is operating around its  
engineered capacity level.  
B-24  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
E
EFS  
Error Free Seconds: A unit used to specify the error performance of T carrier  
systems, usually expressed as EFS per hour, day, or week. This method gives a  
better indication of the distribution of bit errors than a simple bit error rate (BER).  
Also refer to SES.  
ELAN  
Emulated Local Area Network: A logical network initiated by using the  
mechanisms defined by LAN Emulation. This could include ATM and legacy  
attached end stations.  
EMA  
Emergency Controller  
EMI  
Electromagnetic Interference: Equipment used in high speed data systems,  
including ATM, that generate and transmit many signals in the radio frequency  
portion of the electromagnetic spectrum. Interference to other equipment or radio  
services may result if sufficient power from these signals escape the equipment  
enclosures or transmission media. National and international regulatory agencies  
(FCC, CISPR, etc.) set limits for these emissions. Class A is for industrial use and  
Class B is for residential use.  
EMI/RFI  
ElectroMagnetic Interface/Radio Frequency Interface: A circuit or device  
containing series inductive (load bearing) and parallel capacitive (non-load  
bearing) components, which provide a low impedance path for high-frequency  
noise around a protected circuit.  
EML  
Element Management Layer: An abstraction of the functions provided by systems  
that manage each network element on an individual basis.  
EMS  
Element Management System: A management system that provides functions at the  
element Management Layer.  
EOM  
End of Message: An indicator used in the AAL that identifies the last ATM cell  
containing information from a data packet that has been segmented.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E
Glossary  
EN  
European Norm  
End Station  
These devices (e.g., hosts or PCs) enable the communication between ATM end  
stations and end stations on "legacy" LAN or among ATM end stations.  
Entry Border Node  
The node which receives a call over an outside link. This is the first node within a  
peer group to see this call.  
EPD  
Early Packet Discard: A congestion control technique that selectively drops all but  
the last ATM cell in a Classical IP over ATM packet.When congestion occurs, EPD  
discards cells at the beginning of an IP packet, leaving the rest intact.The last cell  
is preserved because it alerts the switch and the destination station of the beginning  
of a new packet.Because IP packets from cells have been discarded receive no  
acknowledgment from the source. Most vendors expect EPD to be used in  
conjunction with unspecified bit rate (UBR) service. Switches simply junk UBR  
cells when congestion occurs, without regard for application traffic.By discarding  
ceiling selectively. so that whole IP packets are resent, EPD makes UBR a safer  
option.  
ER  
Explicit Rate: The Explicit Rate is an RM-cell field used to limit the source ACR  
to a specific value. It is initially set by the source to a requested rate (such as PCR).  
It may be subsequently reduced by any network element in the path to a value that  
the element can sustain. ER is formatted as a rate.  
ES  
End System: A system where an ATM connection is terminated or initiated. An  
originating end system initiates the ATM connection, and terminating end system  
terminates the ATM connection. OAM cells may be generated and received.  
ESD  
Elastic Discharge  
ESF  
Extended Superframe: A DS1 framing format in which 24 DS0 times lots plus a  
coded framing bit are organized into a frame which is repeated 24 times to form a  
superframe.  
B-26  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
F
ESI  
End System Identifier: This identifier distinguishes multiple nodes at the same level  
in case the lower level peer group is partitioned.  
ETSI  
European Telecommunications Standards Institute: The primary  
telecommunications standards organization.  
Exception  
A connectivity advertisement in a PNNI complex node representation that  
represents something other than the default node representation.  
Exit Border Node  
The node that will progress a call over an outside link. This is the last node within  
a peer group to see this call.  
Exterior  
Denotes that an item (e.g., link, node, or reachable address) is outside of a PNNI  
routing domain.  
Exterior Link  
A link which crosses the boundary of the PNNI routing domain. The PNNI protocol  
does not run over an exterior link.  
Exterior Reachable Address  
An address that can be reached through a PNNI routing domain, but which is not  
located in that PNNI routing domain.  
Exterior Route  
A route which traverses an exterior link.  
F
Fairness  
As related to Generic Flow Control (GFC), fairness is defined as meeting all the  
agreed quality of service (QOS) requirements, by controlling the order of service  
for all active connections.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
F
Glossary  
FC  
Feedback Control: Feedback controls are defined as the set of actions taken by the  
network and by the end-systems to regulate the traffic submitted on ATM  
connections according to the state of network elements.  
FCC  
Federal Communications Commission: The federal organization in Washington  
D.C. set up by the Communications Act of 1934. It has the authority to regulate all  
interstate (but not intrastate) communications originating in the United States. The  
FCC is the U.S. federal regulatory agency responsible for the regulation of  
interstate and international communications by radio, television, wire, satellite and  
cable.  
FCS  
Frame Check Sequence: Any mathematical formula which derives a numeric value  
based on the bit pattern of a transmitted block of information and uses that value at  
the receiving end to determine the existence of any transmission errors.  
FDDI  
Fiber Distributed Data Interface: A 100 Mbps Local Area Network standard that  
was developed by ANSI that is designed to work on fiber-optic cables, using  
techniques similar to token-ring.  
FDDI-PMD  
FDDI Physical Medium Dependant: This sublayer defines the parameters at the  
lowest level, such as speed of bits on the media.The half of BISDN Layer 1.  
FEBE  
Far End Block Error: A maintenance signal transmitted in the PHY overhead that  
a bit error(s) has been detected at the PHY layer at the far end of the link. This is  
used to monitor bit error performance of the link.  
FEC  
Forward Error Correction: A technique for detection and correction of errors in a  
digital data stream.  
B-28  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
F
FECN  
Forward Explicit Congestion Notification: This bit notifies the user that  
congestion-avoidance procedures should be initiated were applicable for traffic in  
the same direction as the received frame. This bit notifies the user that congestion-  
avoidance procedures should be initiated were applicable for traffic in the same  
direction as the received frame. It indicates that this frame, on this logical  
connection, has encountered congested resources.  
FERF  
Far End Receive Failure  
FG  
Functional Group: A collection of functions related in such a way that they will be  
provided by a single logical component. Examples include the Route Server  
Functional Group (RSFG), the IASG (Internetwork Address Sub-Group),  
Coordination Functional Group (ICFG), the Edge Device Functional Group  
(EDFG) and the ATM attached host Behavior Functional Group (AHFG).  
FIFO  
First-in First-out: All telephone networks are a trade-off. It’s simply to expensive  
to build a phone network which will be ready to give everyone dial tone and a  
circuit if everyone picked up the phone simultaneously and tried to make a call.  
There are basically two ways of handling calls which cannot be sent on their way-  
i.e. for which there’s no present available capacity. First, you can "block" the call.  
This means giving the caller a busy or a "nothing" (also called "high and dry").  
Second, you can put the call into a queue. Now you have people waiting in queue,  
how do you handle them? The most equitable-the way most queues work-is to  
handle the calls on the basis of First In, First Out.(First call to come in is handled  
first.) There are other ways of handling calls in a queue-including First In, Last Out,  
by priority (e.g. which line you came in on and how much it cost, or how high you  
are in the corporation, etc.)  
Flush Protocol  
The flush protocol is provided to ensure the correct order of delivery of unicast data  
frames.  
Foreign Address  
An address that does not match any of a given node's summary addresses.  
Forwarding Description  
The resolved mapping of an MPOA Target to a set of parameters used to set up an  
ATM connection on which to forward packets.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
G
Glossary  
FPGA  
Field Programmable Gate Array: A specialized microprocessor manufactured  
without physical connections between its logic gates, but with potential  
connections that can be firmed up in the field. (paraphrased from Newton)  
FRS  
Frame-Relay Service: A connection oriented service that is capable of carrying up  
to 4096 bytes per frame.  
FRTT  
Fixed Round-Trip Time: This is the sum of the fixed and propagation delays from  
the source to the furthest destination and back.  
G
G.703  
ITU-T Recommendation G.703, "Physical/Electrical Characteristics of  
Hierarchical Digital Interfaces".  
G.704  
ITU-T Recommendation G.704, "Synchronous Frame Structures Used at Primary  
and Secondary Hierarchy Levels".  
G.804  
ITU-T Recommendation G.804, "ATM Cell Mapping into Plesiochronous Digital  
Hierarchy (PDH)".  
GCAC  
Generic Connection Admission Control: This is a process to determine if a link has  
potentially enough resources to support a connection.  
GCRA  
Generic Cell Rate Algorithm: The GCRA is used to define conformance with  
respect to the traffic contract of the connection. For each cell arrival the GCRA  
determines whether the cell conforms to the traffic contract. The UPC function may  
implement the GCRA, or one or more equivalent algorithms to enforce  
conformance. The GCRA is defined with two parameters: the Increment (I) and the  
Limit (L).  
B-30  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
H
GFC  
Generic Flow Control: GFC is a field in the ATM header which can be used to  
provide local functions (e.g., flow control). It has local significance only and the  
value encoded in the field is not carried end-to-end.  
GWPAD  
GateWay Packet Assembler and Disassembler : A functional unit that interconnects  
two computer networks with different network architectures and enables data  
terminal equipment (DTE) not equipped for packet switching to access a packet  
1
switched network.  
H
H-Channel  
H-Channels are ISDN bearer services that have pre-defined speeds, starting and  
stopping locations on a PRI and are contiguously transported from one PRI site  
through networks to another PRI site.  
H0 Channel  
A 384 kbps channel that consists of six contiguous DS0s (64 kbps) of a T1 line.  
H10 Channel  
The North American 1472 kbps channel from a T1 or primary rate carrier. This is  
equivalent to twenty-three (23) 64 kbps channels.  
H11 Channel  
The North American primary rate used as a single 1536 kbps channel. This channel  
uses 24 contiguous DS0s or the entire T1 line except for the 8 kbps framing pattern.  
H12  
The European primary rate used as a single 1920 kbps channel (30 64 kbps channels  
or the entire E1 line except for the 64 kbps framing and maintenance channel.  
Host Apparent Address  
A set of internetwork layer addresses which a host will directly resolve to lower  
layer addresses.  
1.IBM Dictionary of Computing  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
Glossary  
HBFG  
Host Behavior Functional Group: The group of functions performed by an ATM-  
attached host that is participating in the MPOA service.  
HDLC  
High Level Data Link Control: An ITU-TSS link layer protocol standard for point-  
to-point and multi-point communications.  
Header  
Protocol control information located at the beginning of a protocol data unit.  
HEC  
Header Error Control: Using the fifth octet in the ATM cell header, ATM equipment  
may check for an error and corrects the contents of the header. The check character  
is calculated using a CRC algorithm allowing a single bit error in the header to be  
corrected or multiple errors to be detected.  
Hello Packet  
A type of PNNI Routing packet that is exchanged between neighboring logical  
nodes.  
Hierarchically Complete Source Route  
A stack of DTLs representing a route across a PNNI routing domain such that a  
DTL is included for each hierarchical level between and including the current level  
and the lowest visible level in which the source and destination are reachable.  
Hop-by-Hop Route  
A route that is created by having each switch along the path use its own routing  
knowledge to determine the next hop of the route, with the expectation that all  
switches will choose consistent hops such that the call will reach the desired  
destination. PNNI does not use hop-by-hop routing.  
Horizontal Link  
A link between two logical nodes that belong to the same peer group.  
I
IASG  
Internetwork Address Sub-Group: A range of internetwork layer addresses  
summarized in an internetwork layer routing protocol.  
B-32  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
I
ICD  
International Code Designator: This identifies an international organization. The  
registration authority for the International Code Designator is maintained by the  
British Standards Institute. The length of this field is two octets.  
ICR  
Initial Cell Rate: An ABR service parameter, in cells/sec, that is the rate at which  
a source should send initially and after an idle period.  
IDU  
Interface Data Unit: The unit of information transferred to/from the upper layer in  
a single interaction across the SAP. Each IDU contains interface control  
information and may also contain the whole or part of the SDU.  
IEC  
International Electrotechnical Commission: Founded in 1906, this world  
organization prepares and publishes internation standards for all elictrical,  
electronic, and related technologies. The IEC was founded as a result of a resolution  
passed at the International Electrical Congress held in St. Louis (USA) in 1904. The  
membership consists of more than 50 participating companies, including all the  
1
world’s major trading nations and a growing number of industrializing countries.  
Inter-exchange Carrier:  
A long distance telephone company.  
IEEE  
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers: A worldwide engineering  
publishing and standards-making body for the electronics industry.  
IEEE 802.3  
A Local Area Network protocol suite commonly known as Ethernet. Ethernet has  
either a 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps throughput and uses Carrier Sense Multiple Access  
bus with Collision Detection CSMA/CD. This method allows users to share the  
network cable. However, only one station can use the cable at a time. A variety of  
physical medium dependent protocols are supported.  
1.International Electrotechnical Commission Home Page 3 January 2000  
http://www/iec.ch/gnote1-e.htm  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
Glossary  
IEEE 802.5  
A Local Area Network protocol suite commonly known as Token Ring. A standard  
originated by IBM for a token passing ring network that can be configured in a star  
topology. Versions supported are 4 Mbps and 16 Mbps.  
IEEE 802.6  
A Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) standard, using DQDN (Dual Bus  
Distributed Queue) technology. Provides up to 45 Mbit/s data rate on each bus  
today (and may provide up to 150 Mbit/son each bus in the future), for distances  
up to about 100 km. Popular in some parts of Australia and Europe.  
IETF  
Internet Engineering Task Force: The organization that provides the coordination  
of standards and specification development for TCP/IP networking.  
IISP  
Interim Inter Switch Protocol: A call routing scheme used in STM networks.  
Formerly known as PNNI Phase 0. IISP is an interim technology meant to be used  
pending completion of ONNI Phase 1. IISP uses static routing tables established  
1
by the network administrator to route connections around link failures.  
ILMI  
Interim Link Management Interface: An ATM Forum defined interim specification  
for network management functions between an end user and a public or private  
network and between a public network and a private network. This is based on a  
limited subset of SNMP capabilities.  
Induced Uplink  
An uplink "A" that is created due to the existence of an uplink "B" in the child peer  
group represented by the node that created uplink "A". Both "A" and "B" share the  
same upnode, which is higher in the PNNI hierarchy than the peer group in which  
uplink "A" is seen.  
Inside Link  
Synonymous with horizontal link.  
Instance ID  
A subset of an object's attributes which serve to uniquely identify a MIB instance.  
1.Newton’s Telecom Dictionary  
B-34  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
I
Interior  
Denotes that an item (e.g., link, node, or reachable address) is inside of a PNNI  
routing domain.  
Internal Reachable Address  
An address of a destination that is directly attached to the logical node advertising  
the address.  
IOP  
Interoperability: The ability of equipment from different manufacturers (or  
different implementations) to operate together.  
IP  
Internet Protocol: Originally developed by the Department of Defense to support  
interworking of dissimilar computers across a network. This protocol works in  
conjunction with TCP and is usually identified as TCP/IP. A connectionless  
protocol that operates at the network layer (layer 3) of the OSI model.  
IPOA  
IP Over ATM  
IPX  
Novell Internetwork Packet Exchange: A built-in networking protocol for Novell  
Netware. It was derived from the Xerox Network System protocol and operates at  
the network layer of the OSI protocol model.  
IS  
Intermediate System: A system that provides forwarding functions or relaying  
functions or both for a specific ATM connection. OAM cells may be generated and  
received.  
ISDN  
Integrated Services Digital Network: A switched network providing end-to-end  
digital connections where voice, data, video and image services are provided over  
the same transmission facilities. ISDN comes today in two basic flavors-BRI,  
which is 144,000 bits per second and design for the desk top, and PRI which is  
1,544,000 bits per second and design for telephone switches, computer telephony  
and voice processing systems.Neither ISDN BRI or ISPN PRI is a standard service,  
though there are several "standard" configurations.ISDN BRI is a wonderful  
service in your home or office because it can give you video conferencing, and  
ultrafast data communications.But it is not an easy service to get up and running.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I
Glossary  
ISO  
International Standards Organization: An international organization for  
standardization, based in Geneva, Switzerland, that establishes voluntary standards  
and promotes global trade of 90 member countries.  
ITU-T Specifications for Traffic Measurement.  
I.361  
B-ISDN ATM Layer Specification.  
I.362  
B-ISDN ATM Layer (AAL) Functional Description.  
I.363  
B-ISDN ATM Layer (AAL) Specification.  
I.432  
ITU-T Recommendation for B-ISDN User-network Interface.  
ITU-T  
International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications: ITU-T is an  
international body of member countries whose task is to define recommendations  
and standards relating to the international telecommunications industry. The  
fundamental standards for ATM have been defined and published by the ITU-T  
(Previously CCITT).  
ITU H.222  
An ITU-T Study Group 15 standard that addresses the multiplexing of multimedia  
data on an ATM network.  
ITU Q.2100  
B-ISDN Signaling ATM Adaptation Layer Overview.  
ITU Q.2110  
B-ISDN Adaptation Layer -- Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol.  
ITU Q.2130  
B-ISDN Adaptation Layer -- Service Specific Connection Oriented Function for  
Support of Signaling at the UNI.  
B-36  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
J,K  
ITU Q.2931  
The signaling standard for ATM to support Switched Virtual Connections. This is  
based on the signaling standard for ISDN.  
ITU Q.931  
The signaling standard for ISDN to support SVCs. The basis for the signaling  
standard developed for Frame Relay and ATM.  
ITU Q.933  
The signaling standard for Frame Relay to support SVCs. This is based on the  
signaling standard for ISDN.  
IUT  
Implementation Under Test: The particular portion of equipment which is to be  
studied for testing. The implementation may include one or more protocols.  
IXB  
Input eXpandable Buffer  
J,K  
Joining  
The phase in which the LE Client establishes its control connections to the LE  
Server.  
JPEG  
Joint Photographic Experts Group: An ISO Standards group that defines how to  
compress still pictures.  
L
LAN  
Local Area Network: A short distance data communications network (typically  
within a building or campus) used to link together computers and peripheral devices  
(such as printers) under some form of standard control.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L
Glossary  
LANE  
LAN Emulation: The set of services, functional groups and protocols which  
provide for the emulation of LANs utilizing ATM as a backbone to allow  
connectivity among LAN and ATM attached end stations.  
LAPD  
Link Access Procedure D: A layer 2 protocol defined by CCITT (original name of  
ITU-T). This protocol reliably transfers blocks of information across a single Layer  
1 link and supports multiplexing of different connections at Layer 2.  
Layer Entity  
An active element within a layer.  
Layer Function  
A part of the activity of the layer entities.  
Layer Service  
A capability of a layer and the layers beneath it that is provided to the upper layer  
entities at the boundary between that layer and the next higher layer.  
Layer User Data  
Data transferred between corresponding entities on behalf of the upper layer or  
layer management entities for which they are providing services.  
LB  
Leaky Bucket: Leaky Bucket is the term used as an analogous description of the  
algorithm used for conformance checking of cell flows from a user or network. See  
GCRA, UPC and NPC. The "leaking hole in the bucket" applies to the sustained  
rate at which cells can be accommodated, while the "bucket depth" applies to the  
tolerance to cell bursting over a given time period.  
LE  
LAN Emulation. Refer to LANE.  
LED  
Light Emitting Diode: A semiconductor diode that emits light when a current  
passes through it. LEDs are often used for alarm and power indication lights on  
equipment.  
B-38  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
L
Leadership Priority  
The priority with which a logical node wishes to be elected peer group leader of its  
peer group. Generally, of all nodes in a peer group, the one with the highest  
leadership priority will be elected as peer group leader.  
Leaf Node  
Any node in a tree structure that is at the farthest distance from the root (primary  
node), no matter which path is followed. In any tree, a leaf is a node at the end of  
1
the branch, one that has no descendants.  
Leaky Bucket  
An informal term for the Generic Cell Rate Algorithm.  
LE_ARP  
LAN Emulation Address Resolution Protocol: A message issued by a LE client to  
solicit the ATM address of another function.  
LEC  
Local Exchange Carrier: A telephone company affiliate of a Regional Bell  
Operating Company or an Independent Telephone Company.  
LEC  
LAN Emulation Client: The entity in end systems which performs data forwarding,  
address resolution, and other control functions.  
LECID  
LAN Emulation Client Identifier: This identifier, contained in the LAN Emulation  
header, indicates the ID of the ATM host or ATM-LAN bridge. It is unique for every  
ATM Client.  
LECS  
LAN Emulation Configuration Server: This implements the policy controlled  
assignment of individual LE clients to different emulated LANs by providing the  
LES ATM addresses.  
LED  
Light Emitting Diode: A semiconductor diode that emits light when a current  
passes through it. LEDs are often used for alarm and power indication lights on  
equipment.  
1.Microsoft Computer Dictionary  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L
Glossary  
LES  
LAN Emulation Server: This implements the control coordination function for the  
Emulated LAN, examples are enabling a LEC to join an ELAN, resolving MAC to  
ATM addresses.  
LGN  
Logical Group Node: LGN is a single node that represents the lowest level peer  
groups in the respective higher level peer group.  
LIJP  
Leaf Initiated Joint Parameter: Root screening options and Information Element  
(IE) instructions carried in SETUP message.  
Line Card  
A plug-in electronic printed circuit (PC) card that operates lamps, ringing, holding  
and other features one or several telephone lines or telephones in a telephone  
system.  
LINF  
Line Interface  
Link  
An entity that defines a topological relationship (including available transport  
capacity) between two nodes in different subnetworks. Multiple links may exist  
between a pair of subnetworks. Synonymous with logical link.  
Link Aggregation Token  
Refer to Aggregation Token.  
Link Attribute  
A link state parameter that is considered individually to determine whether a given  
link is acceptable and/or desirable for carrying a given connection.  
Link Connection  
A link connection (e.g., at the VP-level) is a connection capable of transferring  
information transparently across a link without adding any overhead, such as cells  
for purposes for monitoring. It is delineated by connection points at the boundary  
of the subnetwork.  
B-40  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
L
Link Constraint  
A restriction on the use of links for path selection for a specific connection.  
Link Metric  
A link parameter that requires the values of the parameter for all links along a given  
path to be combined to determine whether the path is acceptable and/or desirable  
for carrying a given connection.  
Link State Parameter  
Information that captures an aspect or property of a link.  
LLC  
Logic Link Control: A protocol developed by the IEEE 802.2 committee for data-  
link level transmission control. It is the upper sublayer of the IEEE Layer 2(OSI)  
protocol that compliments the MAC protocol. IEEE standard 802.2 includes end-  
system addressing and error checking. It also provides a common access control  
standard and governs the assembly of data packets and their exchange between data  
stations independent of how the packets are transmitted on the LAN.  
LNNI  
LANE NNI: The standardized interface between two LAN servers (LES-LES,  
BUS-BUS, LECS-LECS and LECS-LES).  
LOC  
Loss of Cell Delineation: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal  
transmitted in the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost  
cell delineation. Used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.  
LOF  
Loss of Frame: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in  
the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost frame  
delineation. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.  
Logical Group Node  
A logical node that represents a lower level peer group as a single point for purposes  
of operating at one level of the PNNI routing hierarchy.  
Logical Link  
An abstract representation of the connectivity between two logical nodes. This  
includes individual physical links, individual virtual path connections, and parallel  
physical links and/or virtual path connections.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
L
Glossary  
Logical Node  
An abstract representation of a peer group or a switching system as a single point.  
Logical Node ID  
A string of bits that unambiguously identifies a logical node within a routing  
domain.  
LOP  
Loss of Pointer: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in  
the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the pointer to  
the start of cell in the payload. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY  
layer.  
LOS  
Loss of Signal: A condition at the receiver or a maintenance signal transmitted in  
the PHY overhead indicating that the receiving equipment has lost the received  
signal. This is used to monitor the performance of the PHY layer.  
LPF  
Low Pass Filter: In an MPEG-2 clock recovery circuit, it is a technique for  
smoothing or averaging changes to the system clock.  
LSAP  
Link Service Access Point: Logical address of boundary between layer 3 and LLC  
sublayer 2.  
LSB  
Least Significant Bit: The lowest order bit in the binary representation of a  
numerical value.  
LSR  
Leaf Setup Request: A setup message type used when a leaf node requests  
connection to existing point-to-multipoint connection or requests creation of a new  
multipoint connection.  
LT  
Lower Tester: The representation in ISO/IEC 9646 of the means of providing,  
during test execution, indirect control and observation of the lower service  
boundary of the IUT using the underlying service provider.  
B-42  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
M
LTE  
SONET Lite Terminating Equipment: ATM equipment terminating a  
communications facility using a SONET Lite Transmission Convergence (TC)  
layer. This is usually reserved for end user or LAN equipment. The SONET Lite  
TC does not implement some of the maintenance functions used in long haul  
networks such as termination of path, line and section overhead.  
LUNI  
LANE UNI: The standardized interface between a LE client and a LE Server  
(LES,LECS and BUS).  
M
M1  
Management Interface 1: The management of ATM end devices.  
M2  
Management Interface 2: The management of Private ATM networks or switches.  
M3  
Management Interface 3: The management of links between public and private  
networks.  
M4  
Management Interface 4: The management of public ATM networks.  
M5  
Management Interface 5: The management of links between two public networks.  
MAC  
Media Access Control: IEEE specifications for the lower half of the data link layer  
(layer 2) that defines topology dependent access control protocols for IEEE LAN  
specifications.  
MAC Address  
The address for a device as it is identified at the Media Access Control layer in the  
network architecture.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
Glossary  
MAN  
Metropolitan Area Network: A network designed to carry data over an area larger  
than a campus such as an entire city and its outlying area.  
Managed System  
An entity that is managed by one or more management systems, which can be either  
Element Management Systems, Subnetwork or Network Management Systems, or  
any other management systems.  
Management Domain  
An entity used here to define the scope of naming.  
Management System  
An entity that manages a set of managed systems, which can be either NEs,  
subnetworks or other management systems.  
MAT  
Maintenance and Administration Terminal  
MaxCR  
Maximum Cell Rate: This is the maximum capacity usable by connections  
belonging to the specified service category.  
Mbps  
Mega Bits Per Second: Million bits per second  
MBps  
Mega Bytes Per Second: Million bytes per second  
MBS  
Maximum Burst Size: In the signaling message, the Burst Tolerance (BT) is  
conveyed through the MBS which is coded as a number of cells. The BT together  
with the SCR and the GCRA determine the MBS that may be transmitted at the  
peak rate and still be in conformance with the GCRA.  
MCDV  
Maximum Cell Delay Variance: This is the maximum two-point CDV objective  
across a link or node for the specified service category.  
B-44  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
M
MCLR  
Maximum Cell Loss Ratio: This is the maximum ratio of the number of cells that  
do not make it across the link or node to the total number of cells arriving at the  
link or node.  
MCR  
Minimum Cell Rate: An ABR service traffic descriptor, in cells/sec, that is the rate  
at which the source is always allowed to send.  
MCTD  
Maximum Cell Transfer Delay: This is the sum of the fixed delay component across  
the link or node and MCDV.  
Metasignaling  
ATM Layer Management (LM) process that manages different types of signaling  
and possibly semipermanent virtual channels (VCs), including the assignment,  
removal and checking of VCs.  
Metasignaling VCs  
The standardized VCs that convey metasignaling information across a User-  
Network Interface (UNI).  
MIB  
Management Information Base: A definition of management items for some  
network component that can be accessed by a network manager. A MIB includes  
the names of objects it contains and the type of information retained.  
MIB Attribute  
A single piece of configuration, management, or statistical information which  
pertains to a specific part of the PNNI protocol operation.  
MIB Instance  
An incarnation of a MIB object that applies to a specific part, piece, or aspect of  
the PNNI protocol's operation.  
MIB Object  
A collection of attributes that can be used to configure, manage, or analyze an  
aspect of the PNNI protocol's operation.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
M
Glossary  
MID  
Message Identifier: The message identifer is used to associate ATM cells that carry  
segments from the same higher layer packet.  
MIR  
Maximum Information Rate: Refer to PCR.  
Mrm  
An ABR service parameter that controls allocation of bandwidth between forward  
RM-cells, backward RM-cells, and data cells.  
MMF  
Multimode Fiberoptic Cable: Fiberoptic cable in which the signal or light  
propagates in multiple modes or paths. Since these paths may have varying lengths,  
a transmitted pulse of light may be received at different times and smeared to the  
point that pulses may interfere with surrounding pulses. This may cause the signal  
to be difficult or impossible to receive. This pulse dispersion sometimes limits the  
distance over which a MMF link can operate.  
MPEG  
Motion Picture Experts Group: An ISO Standards group dealing with video and  
audio compression techniques and mechanisms for multiplexing and synchronizing  
various media streams.  
MPOA  
Multiprotocol over ATM: An effort taking place in the ATM Forum to standardize  
protocols for the purpose of running multiple network layer protocols over ATM.  
MPOA Client  
A device which implements the client side of one or more of the MPOA protocols,  
(i.e., is a SCP client and/or an RDP client. An MPOA Client is either an Edge  
Device Functional Group (EDFG) or a Host Behavior Functional Group (HBFG).  
MPOA Server  
An MPOA Server is any one of an ICFG or RSFG.  
MPOA Service Area  
The collection of server functions and their clients. A collection of physical devices  
consisting of an MPOA server plus the set of clients served by that server.  
B-46  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
M
MPOA Target  
A set of protocol address, path attributes, (e.g., internetwork layer QoS, other  
information derivable from received packet) describing the intended destination  
and its path attributes that MPOA devices may use as lookup keys.  
MSB  
Most Significant Bit: The highest order bit in the binary representation of a  
numerical value.  
MT  
Message Type: The field containing the bit flags of a RM-cell. These flags are as  
follows:  
•
•
•
•
DIR = 0 for forward RM-cells = 1 for backward;  
RM-cells BN = 1 for Non-Source Generated (BECN)  
RM-cells = 0 for Source Generated RM-cells  
Congestion Indicator (CI) = 1 to indicate congestion = 0 otherwise NI = 1 to  
indicate no additive increase allowed = 0 otherwise  
•
RA -- Not used for ATM Forum Available Bit Rate (ABR).  
MTBF  
Mean Time Between Failures: The length of time a user may reasonably expect a  
device or system to work before an incapacitating fault occurs.  
MTP  
Message Transfer Part: Level 1 through 3 protocols of the SS7 protocol stack. MTP  
3 (Level 3) is used to support BISUP.  
Multicasting  
The transmit operation of a single PDU by a source interface where the PDU  
reaches a group of one or more destinations.  
Multiplexing  
A function within a layer that interleaves the information from multiple  
connections into one connection.  
Multipoint Access  
User access in which more than one terminal equipment (TE) is supported by a  
single network termination.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N
Glossary  
Multipoint-to-Multipoint Connection  
A Multipoint-to-Multipoint Connection is a collection of associated ATM VC or  
VP links, and their associated nodes, with the following properties:  
•
All Nodes in the connection, called endpoints, serve as a Root Node in a  
Point-to-Multipoint connection to all of the (N-1) remaining endpoints.  
•
Each of the endpoints on the connection can send information directly to any  
other endpoint, but the receiving endpoint cannot distinguish which of the  
endpoints is sending information without additional (e.g., higher layer)  
information.  
Multipoint-to-Point Connection  
A Point-to-Multipoint Connection may have zero bandwidth from the Root node  
to the Leaf Nodes, and non-zero return bandwidth from the Leaf Nodes to the Root  
Node. Such a connection is also known as a Multipoint-to-Point Connection. Note  
that UNI 4.0 does not support this connection type.  
MUX  
Multiplexer: Electronic equipment which allows two or more signals to pass over  
one communications circuit. That (circuit) may be a phone line, a microwave  
circuit, a through-the-air TV signal. That circuit may be analog or digital. There are  
many multiplexing techniques to accommodate both.  
N
Native Address  
An address that matches one of a given node's summary addresses.  
NC  
Network Connection  
NDIS  
Network Driver Interface Specification: Refer to 3COM/Microsoft, LAN Manager:  
Network Driver Interface Specification, October 8, 1990.  
NE  
Network Element: A system that supports at least NEFs and may also support  
Operation System Functions/Mediation Functions. An ATM NE may be realized as  
either a standalone device or a geographically distributed system. It cannot be  
further decomposed into managed elements in the context of a given management  
function.  
B-48  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
N
NEF  
Network Element Function: A function within an ATM entity that supports the  
ATM based network transport services, (e.g., multiplexing, cross-connection).  
Neighbor Node  
A node that is directly connected to a particular node via a logical link.  
NEL  
Network Element Layer: An abstraction of functions related specifically to the  
technology, vendor, and the network resources or network elements that provide  
basic communications services.  
NEXT  
Near End Crosstalk: Equipment that must concurrently receive on one wire pair and  
transmit on another wire pair in the same cable bundle must accommodate NEXT  
interference. NEXT is the portion of the transmitted signal that leaks into the  
receive pair. Since at this point on the link the transmitted signal is at maximum and  
the receive signal has been attenuated, it may be difficult to maintain an acceptable  
ACR with the received signal if the cable media allows large amounts of crosstalk  
leakage to occur. Foiled or shielded cables generally have less crosstalk than  
unshielded varieties.  
NIC  
Network Interface Card: The attachment that connects a device to a network. The  
NIC, usually a PC expansion board, executes the code needed by the connected  
device to share a cable or some other media with other stations.  
N-ISDN  
Narrowband Integrated Services Digital Network: Services include basic rate  
interface (2B+D or BRI) and primary rate interface (23B+D or PRI). Supports  
narrowband speeds at/or below 1.5 Mbps.  
NM  
Network Management Entity: The body of software in a switching system that  
provides the ability to manage the PNNI protocol. NM interacts with the PNNI  
protocol through the MIB.  
Nrm  
An ABR service parameter, Nrm is the maximum number of cells a source may  
send for each forward RM-cell.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N
Glossary  
NMS  
Network Management System: The system responsible for managing a portion of  
a network. The NMS talks to network management agents, which reside in the  
managed nodes, via a network management protocol. The NMS is the entity that  
implements functions at the Network Management Layer. It may also include  
Element Management Layer functions. A Network Management System may  
manage one or more other Network Management Systems.  
NML  
Network Management Layer: An abstraction of the functions provided by systems  
which manage network elements on a collective basis, so as to monitor and control  
the network end-to-end.  
NMS  
Network Management System: An entity that implements functions at the Network  
Management Layer. It may also include Element Management Layer functions. A  
Network Management System may manage one or more other Network  
Management Systems.  
NMS Environment  
A set of NMS which cooperate to manage one or more subnetworks.  
NNI  
Network Node Interface: An interface between ATM switches defined as the  
interface between two network nodes.  
Nodal Attribute  
A nodal state parameter that is considered individually to determine whether a  
given node is acceptable and/or desirable for carrying a given connection.  
Nodal Constraint  
A restriction on the use of nodes for path selection for a specific connection.  
Nodal Metric  
A nodal parameter that requires the values of the parameter for all nodes along a  
given path to be combined to determine whether the path is acceptable and/or  
desirable for carrying a given connection.  
Nodal State Parameter  
Information that captures an aspect or property of a node.  
B-50  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
N
Node  
Synonymous with logical node.  
Novell Internetwork Packet Exchange  
Netware’s native LAN communications protocol, used to move data between  
server and/or workstation programs, running on different network nodes. IPX  
packets are encapsulated and carried by the packets used in Ethernet and the  
similiar frames used in Token-Ring networks. IPX supports packet sizes up to 64  
1
bytes.  
NPC  
Network Parameter Control: Network Parameter Control is defined as the set of  
actions taken by the network to monitor and control traffic from the NNI. Its main  
purpose is to protect network resources from malicious as well as unintentional  
misbehavior which can affect the QoS of other already established connections by  
detecting violations of negotiated parameters and taking appropriate actions. Refer  
to UPC.  
nrt-VBR  
Non-real-time VBR  
NRZ  
Non-Return to Zero: A binary encoding scheme in which ones and zeroes are  
represented by opposite and alternating high and low voltages and where there is  
no return to a zero (reference) voltage between encoded bits.NRZ is now used as  
an encryption scheme for getting data onto and off hard disk fast.It eliminates the  
need for clock pulses and yields up to 18.5 kilobytes per track and high read/write  
speeds.  
NSAP  
Network Service Access Point: OSI generic standard for a network address  
consisting of 20 octets. ATM has specified E.164 for public network addressing and  
the NSAP address structure for private network addresses.  
NSR  
Non-Source Routed: Frame forwarding through a mechanism other than Source  
Route Bridging.  
1.Newton’s Telecom Dictionary  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
O
Glossary  
NT  
Network Termination: Network Termination represents the termination point of a  
Virtual Channel, Virtual Path, or Virtual Path/Virtual Channel at the UNI.  
NTSC  
National Television System Committee: An industry group that defines how  
television signals are encoded and transmitted in the US.  
Nucleus  
The interior reference point of a logical node in the PNNI complex node  
representation.  
nx64K  
This refers to a circuit bandwidth or speed provided by the aggregation of nx64  
kbps channels (where n= integer > 1). The 64K or DS0 channel is the basic rate  
provided by the T Carrier systems.  
O
OAM  
Operations Administration and Maintenance: A group of network management  
functions that provide network fault indication, performance information, and data  
and diagnosis functions.  
Octet  
A term for eight (8) bits that is sometimes used interchangeably with "byte" to mean  
the same thing.  
ODI  
Open Data-Link Interface: This refers to Novell Incorporated, Open Data-Link  
Interface Developer's Guide, March 20, 1992.  
One Hop Set  
A set of hosts which are one hop apart in terms of internetwork protocols TTLs  
(TTL=0 -on the wire+).  
OOF  
Out of Frame. Refer to LOF.  
B-52  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
O
OSC  
Oscillator: A device for generating an analog test signal or an electronic circuit that  
creates a single frequency signal.  
OSI  
Open Systems Interconnection: A seven (7) layer architecture model for  
communications systems developed by the ISO for the interconnection of data  
communications systems. Each layer uses and builds on the services provided by  
those below it.  
OSI Physical Layer  
Usually taken to be SONET/SDH (which itself has 4 layers...) but can be other  
1
things as well. The PHY deals with medium-related issues.  
OSPF  
Open Shortest Path First: A link-state routing algorithm that is used to calculate  
routes based on the number of routers, transmission speed, delays and route cost.  
OUI  
Organizationally Unique Identifier: The OUI is a three-octet field in the IEEE  
802.1a defined SubNetwork Attachment Point (SNAP) header, identifying an  
organization which administers the meaning of the following two octet Protocol  
Identifier (PID) field in the SNAP header. Together they identify a distinct routed  
or bridged protocol.  
Outlier  
A node whose exclusion from its containing peer group would significantly  
improve the accuracy and simplicity of the aggregation of the remainder of the peer  
group topology.  
Outside Link  
A link to an outside node.  
Outside Node  
A node which is participating in PNNI routing, but which is not a member of a  
particular peer group.  
1.ICell Relay Retreat. Indiana University 25 August 1996  
http://cell-relay.indiana.edu/cell-relay/  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P
Glossary  
OXB  
Output eXpandable Buffer  
P
Packet  
A device for generating an analog test signal or an electronic circuit that creates a  
single frequency signal.  
Packet Switch  
A device that routes and forwards structured messages (packets).  
Packet Switching  
A data transmission method used in a network where user information is segmented  
and routed in discreet data envelopes called packets, each with its own appended  
control information for routing, sequencing, and error checking. Packet switched  
networks typically employ a full three-layer protocol stack (physical link, data link,  
network) in every node.  
PAD  
Packet Assembler and Disassembler: A PAD assembles packets of asynchronous  
data and emits these buffers in a burst to a packet switch network. The PAD also  
disassembles packets from the network and emits the data to the non-packet device.  
Parent Node  
The logical group node that represents the containing peer group of a specific node  
at the next higher level of the hierarchy.  
Parent Peer Group  
The parent peer group of a peer group is the one containing the logical group node  
representing that peer group. The parent peer group of a node is the one containing  
the parent node of that node.  
Path Constraint  
A bound on the combined value of a topology metric along a path for a specific  
connection.  
B-54  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
P
PBX  
Private Branch eXchange: PBX is the term given to a device which provides private  
local voice switching and voice-related services within the private network. A PBX  
could have an ATM API to utilize ATM services, for example Circuit Emulation  
Service.  
PC  
Protocol Control: Protocol Control is a mechanism which a given application  
protocol may employ to determine or control the performance and health of the  
application. Example, protocol liveness may require that protocol control  
information be sent at some minimum rate; some applications may become  
intolerable to users if they are unable to send at least at some minimum rate. For  
such applications, the concept of MCR is defined. Refer to MCR.  
PCM  
Pulse Code Modulation: An audio encoding algorithm which encodes the  
amplitude of a repetitive series of audio samples. This encoding algorithm converts  
analog voice samples into a digital bit stream.  
PCMCIA  
Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (an awful mouthful)  
standardizes credit-card size packages for memory and input/output (modems,  
LAN cards etc.) for computers, laptops, palmtops, etc. There are three physical  
standard for PCMCIA cards-Type 1,2,3 and undefined standard called type 4,  
which only Toshiba has at this moment.  
PCO  
Point of Control and Observation: A place (point) within a testing environment  
where the occurrence of test events is to be controlled and observed as defined by  
the particular abstract test method used.  
PCR  
Program Clock Reference: A timestamp that is inserted by the MPEG-2 encoder  
into the Transport Stream to aid the decoder in the recovering and tracking the  
encoder clock.  
PCR  
Peak Cell Rate: The Peak Cell Rate, in cells/sec, is the cell rate which the source  
may never exceed.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P
Glossary  
PDH  
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy: PDH (plesiochronous means nearly  
synchronous), was developed to carry digitized voice over twisted pair cabling  
more efficiently. This evolved into the North American, European, and Japanese  
Digital Hierarchies where only a discrete set of fixed rates is available, namely,  
nxDS0 (DS0 is a 64 kbps rate) and then the next levels in the respective multiplex  
hierarchies.  
PDU  
Protocol Data Unit: A PDU is a message of a given protocol comprising payload  
and protocol-specific control information, typically contained in a header. PDUs  
pass over the protocol interfaces which exist between the layers of protocols (per  
OSI model).  
Peer Entities  
Entities within the same layer.  
Peer Group Level  
The number of significant bits in the peer group identifier of a particular peer group.  
Peer Node  
A node that is a member of the same peer group as a given node.  
PES  
Packetized Elementary Stream: In MPEG-2, after the media stream has been  
digitized and compressed, it is formatted into packets before it is multiplexed into  
either a Program Stream or Transport Stream.  
PG  
Peer Group: A set of logical nodes which are grouped for purposes of creating a  
routing hierarchy. PTSEs are exchanged among all members of the group.  
PGI  
Peer Group Identifier: A string of bits that is used to unambiguously identify a peer  
group.  
PGL  
Peer Group Leader: A node which has been elected to perform some of the  
functions associated with a logical group node.  
B-56  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
P
PHY  
OSI Physical Layer: The physical layer provides for transmission of cells over a  
physical medium connecting two ATM devices. This physical layer is comprised  
of two sublayers: the PMD Physical Medium Dependent sublayer, and the TC  
Transmission Convergence sublayer. Refer PMD and TC.  
Physical Layer (PHY) Connection  
An association established by the PHY between two or more ATM entities. A PHY  
connection consists of the concatenation of PHY links in order to provide an end-  
to-end transfer capability to PHY SAPs.  
Physical Link  
A real link which attaches two switching systems.  
PICS  
Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement: A statement made by the  
supplier of an implementation or system stating which capabilities have been  
implemented for a given protocol.  
PID  
Protocol Identification. Refer to OUI.  
PIXIT  
Protocol Implementation eXtra Information for Testing: A statement made by a  
supplier or implementer of an IUT which contains information about the IUT and  
its testing environment which will enable a test laboratory to run an appropriate test  
suite against the IUT.  
Plastic Fiber Optics  
An optical fiber where the core transmission media is plastic in contrast to glass or  
silica cores. Proposed plastic fibers generally have larger attenuation and dispersion  
than glass fiber but may have applications where the distance is limited. Plastic  
systems may also offer lower cost connectors that may be installed with simple  
tools and a limited amount of training.  
PLCP  
Physical Layer Convergence Protocol: The PLCP is defined by the IEEE 802.6. It  
is used for DS3 transmission of ATM. ATM cells are encapsulated in a  
125microsecond frame defined by the PLCP which is defined inside the DS3 M-  
frame.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P
Glossary  
PLL  
Phase Lock Loop: Phase Lock Loop is a mechanism whereby timing information  
is transferred within a data stream and the receiver derives the signal element timing  
by locking its local clock source to the received timing information.  
PLO  
Phase Locked Oscillator  
PM  
Physical Medium: Physical Medium refers to the actual physical interfaces. Several  
interfaces are defined including STS-1, STS-3c, STS-12c, STM-1, STM-4, DS1,  
E1, DS2, E3, DS3, E4, FDDI-based, Fiber Channel-based, and STP. These range  
in speeds from 1.544Mbps through 622.08 Mbps.  
PMD  
Physical Media Dependent: This sublayer defines the parameters at the lowest  
level, such as speed of the bits on the media.  
PNI  
Permit Next Increase: An ABR service parameter, PNI is a flag controlling the  
increase of ACR upon reception of the next backward RM-cell. PNI=0 inhibits  
increase. The range is 0 or 1.  
PNNI  
Private Network-Network Interface: A routing information protocol that enables  
extremely scalable, full function, dynamic multi-vendor ATM switches to be  
integrated in the same network.  
PNNI Protocol Entity  
The body of software in a switching system that executes the PNNI protocol and  
provides the routing service.  
PNNI Routing Control Channel  
VCCs used for the exchange of PNNI routing protocol messages.  
PNNI Routing Domain  
A group of topologically contiguous systems which are running one instance of  
PNNI routing.  
B-58  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
P
PNNI Routing Hierarchy  
The hierarchy of peer groups used for PNNI routing.  
PNNI Topology State Packet  
A type of PNNI Routing packet that is used for flooding PTSEs among logical  
nodes within a peer group.  
POH  
Path Overhead: A maintenance channel transmitted in the SONET overhead  
following the path from the beginning multiplexer to the ending demultiplexer.  
This is not implemented in SONET Lite.  
Point-to-Multipoint Connection  
A Point-to-Multipoint Connection is a collection of associated ATM VC or VP  
links, with associated endpoint nodes, with the following properties:  
•
One ATM link, calledthe Root Link, servesas the root in a simple tree topology.  
When the Root Node sends information, all of the remaining nodes on the  
connection, called Leaf Nodes, receive copies of the information.  
•
Each of the Leaf Nodes on the connection can send information directly to the  
Root Node. The Root Node cannot distinguish which Leaf is sending  
information without additional (higher layer) information. (See note below for  
User Network Interface (UNI) 4.0 support)  
•
The Leaf Nodescannot communicate directlytoeach other withthisconnection  
type.  
Note: UNI 4.0 does not support traffic sent from a Leaf to the Root.  
Point-to-Point Connection  
A connection with only two endpoints.  
Port Identifier  
The identifier assigned by a logical node to represent the point of attachment of a  
link to that node.  
Partial Packet Discard (PPD)  
Partial Packet Discard (PPD) is a congestion control technique that drops all of the  
ATM cells in a Classical IP over ATM packet. When congestion occurs and any  
one cell of a particular frame is dropped, PPD discards the rest of the cells (since  
the frame is errored and will need to be sent again anyway).  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P
Glossary  
PRI  
Primary Rate Interface: An ISDN standard for provisioning of 1.544 Mbps (DS1)  
ISDN services. The standard supports 23 "B" channels of 64 kbps each and one "D"  
channel of 64 kbps.  
Primitive  
An abstract, implementation independent, interaction between a layer service user  
and a layer service provider.  
Private ATM Address  
A twenty-byte address used to identify an ATM connection termination point.  
Protocol  
A set of rules and formats (semantic and syntactic) that determines the  
communication behavior of layer entities in the performance of the layer functions.  
Protocol Control Information  
Information exchanged between corresponding entities, using a lower layer  
connection, to coordinate their joint operation.  
PT  
Payload Type: Payload Type is a 3-bit field in the ATM cell header that  
discriminates between a cell carrying management information or one which is  
carrying user information.  
PTI  
Payload Type Indicator: Payload Type Indicator is the Payload Type field value  
distinguishing the various management cells and user cells. Example: Resource  
Management cell has PTI=110, end-to-end OAM F5 Flow cell has PTI=101.  
PTMPT  
Point-To-Multipoint: A main source to many destination connections.  
PTS  
Presentation Time Stamp: A timestamp that is inserted by the MPEG-2 encoder into  
the packetized elementary stream to allow the decoder to synchronize different  
elementary streams (i.e. lip sync).  
B-60  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Q
PTSE  
PNNI Topology State Element: A collection of PNNI information that is flooded  
among all logical nodes within a peer group.  
PTSP  
PNNI Topology State Packet: A type of PNNI Routing packet that is used for  
flooding PTSEs among logical nodes within a peer group.  
PVC  
Permanent Virtual Circuit: This is a link with static route defined in advance,  
usually by manual setup.  
PVCC  
Permanent Virtual Channel Connection: A Virtual Channel Connection (VCC) is  
an ATM connection where switching is performed on the VPI/VCI fields of each  
cell. A Permanent VCC is one which is provisioned through some network  
management function and left up indefinitely.  
PVPC  
Permanent Virtual Path Connection: A Virtual Path Connection (VPC) is an ATM  
connection where switching is performed on the VPI field only of each cell. A  
Permanent VPC is one which is provisioned through some network management  
function and left up indefinitely.  
Q
QD  
Queuing Delay: Queuing delay refers to the delay imposed on a cell by its having  
to be buffered because of unavailability of resources to pass the cell onto the next  
network function or element. This buffering could be a result of oversubscription  
of a physical link, or due to a connection of higher priority or tighter service  
constraints getting the resource of the physical link.  
QoS  
Quality of Service: Quality of Service is defined on an end-to-end basis in terms of  
the following attributes of the end-to-end ATM connection:  
•
•
•
Cell Loss Ratio  
Cell Transfer Delay  
Cell Delay Variation  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R
Glossary  
R
RBOC  
Regional Bell Operating Company: Seven companies formed to manage the local  
exchanges originally owned by AT&T. These companies were created as a result  
of an agreement between AT&T and the United States Department of Justice.  
RD  
Routing Domain: A group of topologically contiguous systems which are running  
one instance of routing.  
RDF  
Rate Decrease Factor: An ABR service parameter, RDF controls the decrease in the  
cell transmission rate. RDF is a power of 2 from 1/32,768 to 1.  
Registration  
The address registration function is the mechanism by which Clients provide  
address information to the LAN Emulation Server.  
Relaying  
A function of a layer by means of which a layer entity receives data from a  
corresponding entity and transmits it to another corresponding entity.  
RFC  
Request For Comment: The development of TCP/IP standards, procedures and  
specifications is done via this mechanism. RFCs are documents that progress  
through several development stages, under the control of IETF, until they are  
finalized or discarded.  
RFC1695  
Definitions of Managed Objects for ATM Management or AToM MIB.  
RFI  
Radio Frequent Interface: All computer equipment generates radio frequency  
signals. The FCC regulates the amount of RFI a computing device can leak past its  
shielding. A Class A device is sufficient for office use. A Class B is a more stringent  
classification for home equipment use.  
RICE  
RIsc Core Engine  
B-62  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
R
RIF  
Rate Increase Factor: This controls the amount by which the cell transmission rate  
may increase upon receipt of an RM-cell. The additive increase rate  
AIR=PCR*RIF. RIF is a power of 2, ranging from 1/32768 to 1.  
RISC  
Reduced Instruction Set Computing: A computer processing technology in which  
a microprocessor understands a few simple instructions thereby providing fast,  
predictable instruction flow.  
RM  
Resource Management: Resource Management is the management of critical  
resources in an ATM network. Two critical resources are buffer space and trunk  
bandwidth. Provisioning may be used to allocate network resources in order to  
separate traffic flows according to service characteristics. VPCs play a key role in  
resource management. By reserving capacity on VPCs, the processing required to  
establish individual VCCs is reduced. Refer to RM-cell.  
RM-Cell  
Resource Management Cell: Information about the state of the net work like  
bandwidth availability, state of congestion, and impending congestion, is conveyed  
to the source through special control cells called Resource Management Cells (RM-  
cells).  
RO  
Read-Only: Attributes which are read-only can not be written by Network  
Management. Only the PNNI Protocol entity may change the value of a read-only  
attribute. Network Management entities are restricted to only reading such read-  
only attributes. Read-only attributes are typically for statistical information,  
including reporting result of actions taken by auto-configuration.  
ROM  
Read Only Memory: Computer memory which can only be read from.New data  
cannot be entered and the existing data is non-volatile.This means it stays there  
even when power is turned off.  
Root Node  
1
A node of a tree stucture that has no parent nodes.  
1.IBM Dictionary of Computing  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
R
Glossary  
Route Server  
A physical device that runs one or more network layer routing protocols, and which  
uses a route query protocol in order to provide network layer routing forwarding  
descriptions to clients.  
Router  
A physical device that is capable of forwarding packets based on network layer  
information and that also participates in running one or more network layer routing  
protocols.  
Routing Computation  
The process of applying a mathematical algorithm to a topology database to  
compute routes. There are many types of routing computations that may be used.  
The Djikstra algorithm is one particular example of a possible routing computation.  
Routing Constraint  
A generic term that refers to either a topology constraint or a path constraint.  
Routing Information Protocol  
Based on distance-vector algorithms that measure the shortest path between two  
points on a network, based on the addresses of the originating and destiantion  
devices. The shortest path is determined by the number of “hops” between those  
points. Each router maintains a routing table, or routing database, of known  
addresses and routes; each router periodically broadcasts the contents of its table to  
neighboring routers in order that the entire network can maintain a synchronized  
1
database.  
Routing Protocol  
A general term indicating a protocol run between routers and/or route servers in  
order to exchange information used to allow computation of routes. The result of  
the routing computation will be one or more forwarding descriptions.  
RS  
Remote single-layer (Test Method): An abstract test method in which the upper  
tester is within the system under test and there is a point of control and observation  
at the upper service boundary of the Implementation Under Test (IUT) for testing  
one protocol layer. Test events are specified in terms of the abstract service  
primitives (ASP) and/or protocol data units at the lower tester PCO.  
1.Newton’s Telecom Dictionary  
B-64  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
R
RS-232C  
A set of standards specifying various electrical and mechanical characteristics for  
interfaces between computers, terminals and modems.The RS-232-C standard,  
which was developed by the EIA (Electrical Industries Association), defines the  
mechanical and electrical characteristics for connecting DTE and DCE data  
communications devices. It defines what the interface does, circuit functions and  
their corresponding connector pin assignments.The standard applies to both  
synchronous and asynchronous binary data transmission.  
RSE  
Remote Single-layer Embedded (Test Method): An abstract test method in which  
the upper tester is within the system under test and there is a point of control and  
observation at the upper service boundary of the Implementation Under Test (IUT)  
for testing a protocol layer or sublayer which is part of a multi-protocol IUT.  
RSFG  
Route Server Functional Group: The group of functions performed to provide  
internetworking level functions in an MPOA System. This includes running  
conventional interworking Routing Protocols and providing inter-IASG  
destination resolution.  
RTC  
Runtime Control: An SCSA definition. The mechanism by which one Resource  
Object can influence the behavior of another. Typically used for things such as  
1
terminating consitions an speed/volume control.  
rt-VBR  
Real-Time VBR  
RW  
Read-Write: Attributes which are read-write can not be written by the PNNI  
protocol entity. Only the Network Management Entity may change the value of a  
read-write attribute. The PNNI Protocol Entity is restricted to only reading such  
read-write attributes. Read-write attributes are typically used to provide the ability  
for Network Management to configure, control, and manage a PNNI Protocol  
Entity's behavior.  
1.Newton’s Telecom Dictionary  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
Glossary  
S
SA  
Source Address: The address from which the message or data originated.  
SA  
Source MAC Address: A six octet value uniquely identifying an end point and  
which is sent in an IEEE LAN frame header to indicate source of frame.  
SAAL  
Signaling ATM Adaptation Layer: This resides between the ATM layer and the  
Q.2931 function. The SAAL provides reliable transport of Q.2931 messages  
between Q.2931 entities (e.g., ATM switch and host) over the ATM layer; two  
sublayers: common part and service specific part.  
SAP  
Service Access Point: A SAP is used for the following purposes:  
•
When the application initiates an outgoing call to a remote ATM device, a  
destination_SAP specifies the ATM address of the remote device, plus further  
addressing that identifies the target software entity within the remote device.  
•
When the application prepares to respond to incoming calls from remote ATM  
devices, a local_SAP specifies the ATM address of the device housing the  
application, plus further addressing that identifies the application within the  
local device. There are several groups of SAPs that are specified as valid for  
Native ATM Services.  
SAR  
Segmentation and Reassembly: Method of breaking up arbitrarily sized packets.  
SC  
Subscriber loop system optical fiber Connector: It’s a system that allows one pair  
of wires, that would normally provide one phone line, to carry multiple  
conversations. Various models are available, with capacity ranging from 2 to 96  
lines. A SC or (SLCC) is used between phone company central offices and areas  
where there are too many customers for the cable that is in place. It’s much less  
expensive to install SLCCs than new cable, but the SLCC provides lower-than-  
normal line voltage, which may cause some phones to malfunction.  
B-66  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
S
SCCP  
Signaling Connection and Control Part: A SS7 protocol that provides additional  
functions to the Message Transfer Part (MTP). It typically supports Transaction  
Capabilities Application Part (TCAP).  
Scope  
Defines the level of advertisement for an address. The level is a level of a peer group  
in the PNNI routing hierarchy.  
SCP  
Service Control Point: A computer and database system which executes service  
logic programs to provide customer services through a switching system. Messages  
are exchanged with the SSP through the SS7 network.  
SCR  
Sustainable Cell Rate: An upper bound on the conforming average rate of an ATM  
connection over time scales which are long relative to those for which the PCR is  
defined. Enforcement of this bound by the UPC could allow the network to allocate  
sufficient resources, but less than those based on the PCR, and still ensure that the  
performance objectives (e.g., for Cell Loss Ratio) can be achieved.  
SDH  
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy: The ITU-TSS International standard for  
transmitting information over optical fiber.  
SDT  
Structured Data Transfer: An AAL1 data transfer mode in which data is structured  
into blocks which are then segmented into cells for transfer.  
SDU  
Service Data Unit: A unit of interface information whose identity is preserved from  
one end of a layer connection to the other.  
SE  
Switching Element: Switching Element refers to the device or network node which  
performs ATM switching functions based on the VPI or VPI/VCI pair.  
SEAL  
Simple and Efficient Adaptation Layer: An earlier name for AAL5.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
Glossary  
Segment  
A single ATM link or group of interconnected ATM links of an ATM connection.  
SEL  
Selector: A subfield carried in SETUP message part of ATM endpoint address  
Domain specific Part (DSP) defined by ISO 10589, not used for ATM network  
routing, used by ATM end systems only.  
Semipermanent Connection  
A connection established via a service order or via network management.  
SES  
Severely Errored Seconds: A unit used to specify the error performance of T carrier  
systems. This indicates a second containing ten or more errors, usually expressed  
as SES per hour, day, or week. This method gives a better indication of the  
distribution of bit errors than a simple Bit Error Rate (BER). Refer also to EFS.  
SES  
Source End Station: An ATM termination point, which is the source of ATM  
messages of a connection, and is used as a reference point for ABR services. Refer  
to DES.  
SF  
SuperFrame: A DS1 framing format in which 24 DS0 timeslots plus a coded  
framing bit are organized into a frame which is repeated 12 times to form the  
superframe.  
SFIT  
SDH Frame Interface Termination  
Shaping Descriptor  
Signal: An electrical wave used to convey information.N ordered pairs of GCRA  
parameters (I,L) used to define the negotiated traffic shape of a connection.  
SIO  
Scientific or Industrial Organization  
SIPP  
SMDS Interface Protocol: Protocol where layer 2 is based on ATM, AAL and  
DQDB. Layer 1 is DS1 and DS3.  
B-68  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
S
SMDS  
Switched Multi-Megabit Data Services: A connectionless service used to connect  
LANs, MANs and WANs to exchange data.  
SMF  
Single Mode Fiber: Fiber optic cable in which the signal or light propagates in a  
single mode or path. Since all light follows the same path or travels the same  
distance, a transmitted pulse is not dispersed and does not interfere with adjacent  
pulses. SMF fibers can support longer distances and are limited mainly by the  
amount of attenuation. Refer to MMF.  
SN  
Sequence Number: A 4 octet field in a Resource Management cell defined by the  
ITU-T in recommendation I.371 to sequence such cells. It is not used for ATM  
Forum ABR. An ATM switch will either preserve this field or set it in accordance  
with I.371.  
SN cell  
Sequence Number Cell: A cell sent periodically on each link of an AIMUX to  
indicate how many cells have been transmitted since the previous SN cell. These  
cells are used to verify the sequence of payload cells reassembled at the receiver.  
SNA  
Systems Network Architecture: IBM's seven layer, vendor specific architecture for  
data communications  
SNAP  
Standard Network Access Protocol: A version of the IEEE local area network  
logical link control frame similar to the more traditional data link level transmission  
frame that lets you use nonstandard higher-level protocols. The Subnet Access  
Protocol is an Internet protocol that operates between a network entity in the subnet  
and a network entity in the end system and specifies a standard method of  
encapsulating IP datagrams and ARP messages on IEEE networks.The SNAP  
entity in the end system makes use of the services of the subnet and performs three  
key functions: data transfer, connection management, and quality of services  
selection.  
SNC  
Subnetwork Connection: In the context of ATM, an entity that passes ATM cells  
transparently, (i.e., without adding any overhead). A SNC may be either a stand-  
alone SNC, or a concatenation of SNCs and link connections.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
Glossary  
SNMP  
Simple Network Management Protocol: Originally designed for the Department of  
Defense network to support TCP/IP network management. It has been widely  
implemented to support the management of a broad range of network products and  
functions. SNMP is the IETF standard management protocol for TCP/IP networks.  
Start of Header  
A transmission control character used as the first character in the heading of an  
information message. (from Newton's Telecom Dictionary)  
SONET  
Synchronous Optical Network: An ANSI standard for transmitting information  
over optical fiber. This standard is used or accepted in the United States and Canada  
and is a variation of the SDH International standard.  
Source Route  
As used in this document, a hierarchically complete source route.  
Source Traffic  
A set of traffic parameters belonging to the ATM Traffic Descriptor used during the  
connection set-up to capture the intrinsic traffic characteristics of the connection  
requested by the source.  
Spanning Tree Algorithm  
An algorithm, the original version of whcih was invented by Digital Equipment  
Corporation, used to prevent logic loops in a bridged network by creating a  
spanning tree. The algorithm is now documented in the IEEE 802.1d specifications,  
although the Digital algorithm and the IEEE 802.1d algorithm are not the same, nor  
are they compatible. When multiple paths exist, says PC Magazine’s Frank Derfler,  
STA lets a bridge use only the most efficient one. If that path fails, STA  
automatically reconfigures the network to make another path become active,  
sustaining network operations. This algorithm is used mostly by local bridges; it is  
1
not economical for use over leased telephone circuits connecting remote bridges.  
SPE  
SONET Synchronous Payload Envelope. The SONET frame format is divided into  
two main areas: Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE) and Transport Overhead  
(TOH). The SPE contains the information being transported by the frame.  
1.Newton’s Telecom Dictionary  
B-70  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
S
Split System  
A switching system which implements the functions of more than one logical node.  
SPTS  
Single Program Transport Stream: An MPEG-2 Transport Stream that consists of  
only one program.  
SR  
Source Routing: A bridged method whereby the source at a data exchange  
determines the route that subsequent frames will use.  
SRF  
Specifically Routed Frame: A Source Routing Bridging Frame which uses a  
specific route between the source and destination.  
SRT  
Source Routing Transparent: An IETF Bridging Standard combining Transparent  
Bridging and Source Route Bridging.  
SRTS  
Synchronous residual Time Stamp: A clock recovery technique in which difference  
signals between source timing and a network reference timing signal are  
transmitted to allow reconstruction of the source timing at the destination.  
SSCF  
Service Specific Coordination Function: SSCF is a function defined in Q.2130, B-  
ISDN Signaling ATM Adaptation Layer-Service Specific Coordination Function  
for Support of Signaling at the User-to- Network Interface.  
SSCOP  
Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol: An adaptation layer protocol  
defined in ITU-T Specification: Q.2110.  
SSCS  
Service Specific Convergence Sublayer: The portion of the convergence sublayer  
that is dependent upon the type of traffic that is being converted.  
SSO  
Switch Specific Overhead  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
Glossary  
SS7  
Signal System Number 7: A family of signaling protocols originating from  
narrowband telephony. They are used to set-up, manage and tear down connections  
as well as to exchange non-connection associated information. Refer to BISUP,  
MTP, SCCP and TCAP.  
STC  
System Time Clock: The master clock in an MPEG-2 encoder or decoder system.  
STE  
Spanning Tree Explorer: A Source Route Bridging frame which uses the Spanning  
Tree algorithm in determining a route.  
STE  
SONET Section Terminating Equipment: SONET equipment that terminates a  
section of a link between a transmitter and repeater, repeater and repeater, or  
repeater and receiver. This is usually implemented in wide area facilities and not  
implemented by SONET Lite.  
STM  
Synchronous Transfer Module: STM is a basic building block used for a  
synchronous multiplexing hierarchy defined by the CCITT/ITU-T. STM-1 operates  
at a rate of 155.52 Mbps (same as STS-3).  
STM-1  
Synchronous Transport Module 1: SDH standard for transmission over OC-3  
optical fiber at 155.52 Mbps.  
STM-n  
Synchronous Transport Module “n:” (where n is an integer) SDH standards for  
transmission over optical fiber (OC-'n x 3) by multiplexing "n" STM-1 frames,  
(e.g., STM-4 at 622.08 Mbps and STM-16 at 2.488 Gbps).  
STM-nc  
Synchronous Transport Module "n" concatenated: (where n is an integer) SDH  
standards for transmission over optical fiber (OC-'n x 3) by multiplexing "n" STM-  
1 frames, (e.g., STM-4 at 622.08 Mbps and STM-16 at 2.488 Gbps, but treating the  
information fields as a single concatenated payload).  
B-72  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
S
STP  
Signaling Transfer Point: A high speed, reliable, special purpose packet switch for  
signaling messages in the SS7 network.  
STP  
Shielded Twisted Pair: A cable containing one or more twisted pair wires with each  
pair having a shield of foil wrap.  
STS  
Start Synchronous  
STS-1  
Synchronous Transport Signal 1: SONET standard for transmission over OC-1  
optical fiber at 51.84 Mbps.  
STS-n  
Synchronous Transport Signal “n:” (where n is an integer) SONET standards for  
transmission over OC-n optical fiber by multiplexing "n" STS-1 frames, (e.g., STS-  
3 at 155.52 Mbps STS-12 at 622.08 Mbps and STS-48 at 2.488 Gbps).  
STS-nc  
Synchronous Transport Signal "n" concatenated: (where n is an integer) SONET  
standards for transmission over OC-n optical fiber by multiplexing "n" STS-1  
frames, (e.g., STS-3 at 155.52 Mbps STS-12 at 622.08 Mbps and STS-48 at 2.488  
Gbps but treating the information fields as a single concatenated payload).  
Sublayer  
A logical sub-division of a layer.  
Subnet  
The use of the term subnet to mean a LAN technology is a historical use and is not  
specific enough in the MPOA work. Refer to Internetwork Address Sub-Group,  
Direct Set, Host Apparent Address Sub-Group and One Hop Set for more specific  
definitions.  
Subnetwork  
A collection of managed entities grouped together from a connectivity perspective,  
according to their ability to transport ATM cells.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
S
Glossary  
subNMS  
Subnetwork Management System: A Network Management System that is  
managing one or more subnetworks and that is managed by one or more Network  
Management Systems.  
Summary Address  
An address prefix that tells a node how to summarize reachability information.  
SUT  
System Under Test: The real open system in which the Implementation Under Test  
(IUT) resides.  
SVC  
Switched Virtual Circuit: A connection established via signaling. The user defines  
the endpoints when the call is initiated.  
SVCC  
Switched Virtual Channel Connection: A Switched VCC is one which is  
established and taken down dynamically through control signaling. A Virtual  
Channel Connection (VCC) is an ATM connection where switching is performed  
on the VPI/VCI fields of each cell.  
SVE  
SAP Vector Element: The SAP address may be expressed as a vector, (ATM_addr,  
ATM_selector, BLLI_id2, BLLI_id3, BHLI_id), where:  
•
ATM_addr corresponds to the 19 most significant octets of a device's 20-octet  
ATMaddress(privateATMaddressstructure)ortheentireE.164address(E.164  
address structure)  
•
•
ATM_selector corresponds to the least significant octet of a device's 20-octet  
ATM address (private ATM address structure only)  
BLLI_id2 corresponds to an octet in the Q.2931 BLLI information element that  
identifies a layer 2 protocol •BLLI_id3 corresponds to a set of octets in the  
Q.2931 BLLI information element that identify a layer 3 protocol  
•
BHLI_id corresponds to a set of octets in the Q.2931 BHLI information element  
that identify an application (or session layer protocol of an application)  
Each element of the SAP vector is called a SAP Vector Element, or SVE. Each SVE  
consists of a tag, length, and value field.  
B-74  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
T
SVPC  
Switched Virtual Path Connection: A Switched Virtual Path Connection is one  
which is established and taken down dynamically through control signaling. A  
Virtual Path Connection (VPC) is an ATM connection where switching is  
performed on the VPI field only of each cell.  
Switched Connection  
A connection established via signaling.  
Switching System  
A set of one or more systems that act together and appear as a single switch for the  
purposes of PNNI routing.  
Symmetric Connection  
A connection with the same bandwidth value specified for both directions.  
T
TA  
Terminal Adapter: Allows existing non-ISDN terminals to operate on ISDN lines.  
It provides conversion between a non-ISDN terminal device and the ISDN user/  
network interfaced.  
TAXI  
Transparent Asynchronous Transmitter/Receiver Interface 100-Mbps ATM  
physical interface specification based on the FDDI PHY.  
Telnet  
A program that lets you connect to other computers on the Internet. The process by  
which a person using one computer can sign of to a computer in another city, state  
or country. Telnet is the terminal-remote host protocol developed for  
ARPAnet.Using Telnet you can work from PC as if it were a terminal attached to  
anther machine by a hard wired line.  
T1E1  
An ANSI standards sub-committee dealing with Network Interfaces.  
T1M1  
An ANSI standards sub-committee dealing with Inter-Network Operations,  
Administration and Maintenance.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T
Glossary  
T1Q1  
An ANSI standards sub-committee dealing with performance.  
T1S1  
An ANSI standards sub-committee dealing with services, architecture and  
signaling.  
T1X1  
An ANSI standards sub-committee dealing with digital hierarchy and  
synchronization.  
TB  
Transparent Bridging: An IETF bridging standard where bridge behavior is  
transparent to the data traffic. To avoid ambiguous routes or loops, a Spanning Tree  
algorithm is utilized.  
TBE  
Transient Buffer Exposure: A negotiated number of cells that the network would  
like to limit the source to sending during startup periods, before the first RM-cell  
returns.  
TC  
Transaction Capabilities: TCAP (see below) plus supporting Presentation, Session  
and Transport protocol layers.  
TC  
Transmission Convergence: The TC sublayer transforms the flow of cells into a  
steady flow of bits and bytes for transmission over the physical medium. On  
transmit, the TC sublayer maps the cells to the frame format, generates the Header  
Error Check (HEC), sends idle cells when the ATM layer has none to send. On  
reception, the TC sublayer delineates individual cells in the received bit stream, and  
uses the HEC to detect and correct received errors.  
TCAP  
Transaction Capabilities Applications Part: A connectionless SS7 protocol for the  
exchange of information outside the context of a call or connection. It typically runs  
over SCCP and MTP 3.  
B-76  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
T
TCP  
Transmission Control Protocol: Originally developed by the Department of  
Defense to support interworking of dissimilar computers across a network. A  
protocol which provides end-to-end, connection-oriented, reliable transport layer  
(layer 4) functions over IP controlled networks. TCP performs the following  
functions: flow control between two systems, acknowledgements of packets  
received and end-to-end sequencing of packets.  
TCP  
Test Coordination Procedure: A set of rules to coordinate the test process between  
the lower tester and the upper tester. The purpose is to enable the lower tester to  
control the operation of the upper tester. These procedures may, or may not, be  
specified in an abstract test suite.  
TCR  
Tagged Cell Rate: An ABR service parameter, TCR limits the rate at which a source  
may send out-of-rate forward RM-cells. TCR is a constant fixed at 10 cells/second.  
TCS  
Transmission Convergence Sublayer: This is part of the ATM physical layer that  
defines how cells will be transmitted by the actual physical layer.  
TDF  
An ABR service parameter, TDF controls the decrease in ACR associated with  
TOF. TDF is signaled as TDFF, where TDF = TDFF/RDF times the smallest power  
of 2 greater or equal to PCR. TDF is in units of 1/seconds.  
TDFF  
Refer to TDF. TDFF is either zero or a power of two in the range 1/64 to 1 in units  
of 1/cells.  
TDM  
Time Division Multiplexing: A method in which a transmission facility is  
multiplexed among a number of channels by allocating the facility to the channels  
on the basis of time slots.  
TE  
Terminal Equipment: Terminal equipment represents the endpoint of ATM  
connection(s) and termination of the various protocols within the connection(s).  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T
Glossary  
TFTPserver  
Trivial File Transfer Protocol: A simplified version of FTP that transfers files but  
does not provide password protection or user-directory capability.It is associated  
with the TCP/IP family of protocols.TFTP depends on the connectionless datagram  
delivery service, UDP.  
TLV  
Type / Length / Value: A coding methodology which provides a flexible and  
extensible means of coding parameters within a frame. Type indicates parameter  
type. Length indicates parameter's value length. Value indicates the actual  
parameter value.  
TM  
Traffic Management: Traffic Management is the aspects of the traffic control and  
congestion control procedures for ATM. ATM layer traffic control refers to the set  
of actions taken by the network to avoid congestion conditions. ATM layer  
congestion control refers to the set of actions taken by the network to minimize the  
intensity, spread and duration of congestion. The following functions form a  
framework for managing and controlling traffic and congestion in ATM networks  
and may be used in appropriate combinations.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Connection Admission Control  
Feedback Control  
Usage Parameter Control  
Priority Control  
Traffic Shaping  
Network Resource Management  
Frame Discard  
Available Bit Rate (ABR) Flow Control  
TMP  
Test Management Protocol: A protocol which is used in the test coordination  
procedures for a particular test suite.  
TNS  
Transit Network Selection: A signaling element that identifies a public carrier to  
which a connection setup should be routed.  
B-78  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
T
TOF  
Time Out Factor: An ABR service parameter, TOF controls the maximum time  
permitted between sending forward RM-cells before a rate decrease is required. It  
is signaled as TOFF where TOF=TOFF+1. TOFF is a power of 2 in the range: 1/8  
to 4,096.  
TOFF  
Time Out Factor: Refer to TOF.  
Topology Aggregation  
The process of summarizing and compressing topology information at a  
hierarchical level to be advertised at the level above.  
Topology Attribute  
A generic term that refers to either a link attribute or a nodal attribute.  
Topology Constraint  
A topology constraint is a generic term that refers to either a link constraint or a  
nodal constraint.  
Topology Database  
The database that describes the topology of the entire PNNI routing domain as seen  
by a node.  
Topology Metric  
A generic term that refers to either a link metric or a nodal metric.  
Topology State Parameter  
A generic term that refers to either a link parameter or a nodal parameter.  
TP-MIC  
Twisted-Pair Media Interface Connector: This refers to the connector jack at the  
end user or network equipment that receives the twisted pair plug.  
TPCC  
Third Party Call Control: A connection setup and management function that is  
executed from a third party that is not involved in the data flow.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
T
Glossary  
Trail  
An entity that transfers information provided by a client layer network between  
access points in a server layer network. The transported information is monitored  
at the termination points.  
Trailer  
Protocol control information located at the end of a PDU.  
Transit Delay  
The time difference between the instant at which the first bit of a PDU crosses one  
designated boundary and the instant at which the last bit of the same PDU crosses  
a second designated boundary.  
Trap  
A function performed by switch software to catch or trap errors, changes, failures,  
or problems with the switch software or hardware. The trap information is sent to  
a network management station.  
Trm  
An ABR service parameter that provides an upper bound on the time between  
forward RM-cells for an active source. It is 100 times a power of two with a range  
of 100*2-7 to 100*20  
TS  
Transport Stream: One of two types of streams produced by the MPEG-2 Systems  
layer. The Transport Stream consists of 188 byte packets and can contain multiple  
programs.  
TS  
Traffic Shaping: Traffic shaping is a mechanism that alters the traffic characteristics  
of a stream of cells on a connection to achieve better network efficiency, while  
meeting the QoS objectives, or to ensure conformance at a subsequent interface.  
Traffic shaping must maintain cell sequence integrity on a connection. Shaping  
modifies traffic characteristics of a cell flow with the consequence of increasing the  
mean Cell Transfer Delay.  
TS  
Time Stamp: Time Stamping is used on OAM cells to compare time of entry of cell  
to time of exit of cell to be used to determine the cell transfer delay of the  
connection.  
B-80  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
U
TSI  
Telecommunications Standards Institute: The primary telecommunications  
standards organization  
TTC  
Telecommunications Technology Council: A Japanese standards committee.  
TTCN  
Tree and Tabular Combined Notation: The internationally standardized test script  
notation for specifying abstract test suites. TTCN provides a notation which is  
independent of test methods, layers and protocol.  
TTL  
Transitor transitor logic  
U
UBR  
Unspecified Bit Rate: An ATM service category which does not specify traffic  
related service guarantees. Specifically, UBR does not include the notion of a per-  
connection negotiated bandwidth. No numerical commitments are made with  
respect to the cell loss ratio experienced by a UBR connection, or as to the cell  
transfer delay experienced by cells on the connection.  
UCFAD  
Universal Cell Frame Assembly/Disassembly  
UDP  
User Datagram Protocol: This protocol is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite and  
provides a means for applications to access the connectionless features of IP. UDP  
operates at layer 4 of the OSI reference model and provides for the exchange of  
data grams without acknowledgements or guaranteed delivery.  
UL  
Underwriting Laboratory: A privately owned company that charges manufacturers  
a stiff tee to make sure their products meet the safety standards which UL itself  
develops. A UL label on a product has a very specific message. It says the product  
conforms to the safety standards UL has developed, nothing more. It does not  
affirm that the product will work.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
U
Glossary  
UME  
UNI Management Entity: The software residing in the ATM devices at each end of  
the UNI circuit that implements the management interface to the ATM network.  
Unassigned Cells  
A cell identified by a standardized virtual path identifier (VPI) and virtual channel  
identifier (VCI) value, which has been generated and does not carry information  
from an application using the ATM Layer service.  
UNI  
User-Network Interface: An interface point between ATM end users and a private  
ATM switch, or between a private ATM switch and the public carrier ATM  
network; defined by physical and protocol specifications per ATM Forum UNI  
documents. The standard adopted by the ATM Forum to define connections  
between users or end stations and a local switch.  
Unicasting  
The transmit operation of a single PDU by a source interface where the PDU  
reaches a single destination.  
UPC  
Usage Parameter Control: Usage Parameter Control is defined as the set of actions  
taken by the network to monitor and control traffic, in terms of traffic offered and  
validity of the ATM connection, at the end-system access. Its main purpose is to  
protect network resources from malicious as well as unintentional misbehavior,  
which can affect the QoS of other already established connections, by detecting  
violations of negotiated parameters and taking appropriate actions.  
Uplink  
Represents the connectivity from a border node to an up node.  
Upnode  
The node that represents a border node's outside neighbor in the common peer  
group. The upnode must be a neighboring peer of one of the border node's  
ancestors.  
UT  
Upper Tester: The representation in ISO/IEC 9646 of the means of providing,  
during test execution, control and observation of the upper service boundary of the  
IUT, as defined by the chosen Abstract Test Method.  
B-82  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
V
UTOPIA  
Universal Test & Operations Interface for ATM: Refers to an electrical interface  
between the TC and PMD sublayers of the PHY layer.  
UTP  
Unshielded Twisted Pair: A cable having one or more twisted pairs, but with no  
shield per pair.  
V
VBR  
Variable Bit Rate: An ATM Forum defined service category which supports  
variable bit rate data traffic with average and peak traffic parameters.  
VC  
Virtual Channel: Existing with a Virtual Tributary, in the terminology of SONET it  
is equivalent to a traditional TDM channel. It’s just a fancier for a channel, but  
maintaining the (virtual nomenclature of SONET).  
A communications channel that provides for the sequential unidirectional transport  
of ATM cells.  
VCC  
Virtual Channel Connection: A concatenation of VCLs that extends between the  
points where the ATM service users access the ATM layer. The points at which the  
ATM cell payload is passed to, or received from, the users of the ATM Layer (i.e.,  
a higher layer or ATM-entity) for processing signify the endpoints of a VCC. VCCs  
are unidirectional.  
VCCI  
Voluntary Control Council for Interference  
VCI  
Virtual Channel Identifier: A unique numerical tag as defined by a 16 bit field in  
the ATM cell header that identifies a virtual channel, over which the cell is to travel.  
VCL  
Virtual Channel Link: A means of unidirectional transport of ATM cells between  
the point where a VCI value is assigned and the point where that value is translated  
or removed.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
V
Glossary  
VCO  
Voltage Controlled Oscillator: An oscillator whose clock frequency is determined  
by the magnitude of the voltage presented at its input. The frequency changes when  
the voltage changes.  
VD  
Virtual Destination. Refer to VS/VD.  
VF  
Variance Factor: VF is a relative measure of cell rate margin normalized by the  
variance of the aggregate cell rate on the link  
Virtual Channel Switch  
A network element that connects VCLs. It terminates VPCs and translates VCI  
values. It is directed by Control Plane functions and relays the cells of a VC.  
Virtual Path Switch  
A network element that connects VPLs. It translates VPI (not VCI) values and is  
directed by Control Plane functions. It relays the cell of the VP.  
VLAN  
Virtual Local Area Network: Work stations connected to an intelligent device  
which provides the capabilities to define LAN membership.  
VMEBUS  
VEASA Module European Bus: A 32-bit bus developed by Motorola, Signetics,  
Mostek, and Thompson CSF. Used widely in industrial, commercial, and military  
1
applications with over 300 manufacturers of VMEbus products worldwide.  
VP  
Virtual Path: A unidirectional logical association or bundle of VCs.  
VPC  
Virtual Path Connection: A concatenation of VPLs between Virtual Path  
Terminators (VPTs). VPCs are unidirectional.  
1.Newton’s Telecom Dictionary  
B-84  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
W
VPI  
Virtual Path Identifier: An eight bit field in the ATM cell header which indicates  
the virtual path over which the cell should be routed.  
VPL  
Virtual Path Link: A means of unidirectional transport of ATM cells between the  
point where a VPI value is assigned and the point where that value is translated or  
removed.  
VPT  
Virtual Path Terminator: A system that unbundles the VCS of a VP for independent  
processing of each VC.  
VS  
Virtual Scheduling: Virtual Scheduling is a method to determine the conformance  
of an arriving cell. The virtual scheduling algorithm updates a Theoretical Arrival  
Time (TAT), which is the "nominal" arrival time of the cell assuming that the active  
source sends equally spaced cells. If the actual arrival time of a cell is not "too"  
early relative to the TAT, then the cell is conforming. Otherwise the cell is non-  
conforming.  
VS  
Virtual Source. Refer to VS/VD.  
VS/VD  
Virtual Source/Virtual Destination: An ABR connection may be divided into two  
or more separately controlled ABR segments. Each ABR control segment, except  
the first, is sourced by a virtual source. A virtual source implements the behavior  
of an ABR source endpoint. Backwards RM-cells received by a virtual source are  
removed from the connection. Each ABR control segment, except the last, is  
terminated by a virtual destination. A virtual destination assumes the behavior of  
an ABR destination endpoint. Forward RM-cells received by a virtual destination  
are turned around and not forwarded to the next segment of the connection.  
W
WAN  
Wide Area Network: A network which spans a large geographic area relative to  
office and campus environment of LAN (Local Area Network). WAN is  
characterized by having much greater transfer delays due to laws of physics.  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
B-85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X, Y, Z  
Glossary  
X, Y, Z  
XATOM  
Expandable ATM Output Modular Switch  
XDF  
Xrm Decrease Factor: An ABR service parameter, XDF controls the decrease in  
ACR associated with Xrm. It is a power of two in range: [0, 1].  
Xrm  
An ABR service parameter, Xrm limits the number of forward RM-cells which may  
be sent in the absence of received backward RM-cells. The range is 0-255.  
B-86  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C
Worksheets  
2.5 Gbps Switch Configuration Worksheet  
The Centillion 1200N is a 2.5 Gbps Switch.  
Each ATM switch has unique and definitive configuration requirements that must  
be met prior to activation. Items such as Hostname, IP Address, and ATM address  
are required for each switch.  
The configuration worksheets in this section are intended to provide a template for  
these switch requirements. Each configuration worksheet outlines both the switch  
and individual port configurations, allowing quick look-up during installation and  
configuration.  
These worksheets, although optional, can provide a common source for  
configuration as well as for future reference.  
Switch  
Configuration  
Parameter  
Value Setting  
Host Name  
NSAP Address (If using PNNI v1.0, see  
PNNI Configuration  
.)  
ATM IP Address/Subnet Mask  
Ethernet IP Address/Subnet Mask (if  
applicable)  
Software Version  
Enable Password  
Telnet Password  
Location  
Contact and Phone Number  
Clock Mode (Master/Slave, Port #s)  
Switch PNNI Method  
(hop-by-hop or source)  
Serial #  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
C-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2.5 Gbps Switch Configuration Worksheet  
Worksheets  
Slot  
Configuration  
Interface Type  
Slot (OC-12, OC-3, TAXI, DS-3, etc.)  
Serial #  
0
1
2
3
PNNI Version 1.0  
Configuration  
Hierarchy  
Level 1  
Hierarchy  
Level 2  
Hierarchy  
Level 3  
Peer Group Leader (Y/N)  
Hierarchy Level (0-104)  
Peer Group Leader Priority (0-255)  
NMS  
Configuration (if  
applicable)  
NMS  
Host  
Name  
MIB Access  
(Public or  
Private)  
Read-only or  
Write Access  
IP Address/Subnet Mask  
0
1
2
3
C-2  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Worksheets  
Port Configuration Worksheet  
Port Configuration Worksheet  
Port  
Configurations  
Parameter  
Port 00  
Port 01  
Port 02  
Port 03  
Interface Type (MMF, SMF, UTP5, TAXI)  
Port Name  
UNI or NNI  
Network or User  
VPI - # of bits  
VCI - # of bits  
UNI Version (3.0/3.1/4.0)  
SVC Signaling (Y/N)  
ILMI (Y/N)  
ILMI Address Registration (Y/N)  
ELAN Name (if applicable)  
PNNI or IISP (if applicable)  
Possible Clock Source? (Y/N)  
Internal or External Reachable Address  
Parameter  
Port 10  
Port 11  
Port 12  
Port 13  
Interface Type (MMF, SMF, UTP5, TAXI)  
Port Name  
UNI or NNI  
Network or User  
VPI - # of bits  
VCI - # of bits  
UNI Version (3.0/3.1/4.0)  
SVC Signaling (Y/N)  
ILMI (Y/N)  
ILMI Address Registration (Y/N)  
ELAN Name (if applicable)  
PNNI or IISP (if applicable)  
Possible Clock Source? (Y/N)  
Internal or External Reachable Address  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
C-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Port Configuration Worksheet  
Worksheets  
Port 23  
Parameter  
Port 20  
Port 21  
Port 22  
Interface Type (MMF, SMF,UTP5, TAXI)  
Port Name  
UNI or NNI  
Network or User  
VPI - # of bits  
VCI - # of bits  
UNI Version (3.0/3.1/4.0)  
SVC Signaling (Y/N)  
ILMI (Y/N)  
ILMI Address Registration (Y/N)  
ELAN Name (if applicable)  
PNNI or IISP (if applicable)  
Internal or External Reachable Address  
Parameter  
Port 30  
Port 31  
Port 32  
Port 33  
Interface Type (MMF, SMF, UTP5, TAXI)  
Port Name  
UNI or NNI  
Network or User  
VPI - # of bits  
VCI - # of bits  
UNI Version (3.0/3.1/4.0)  
SVC Signaling (Y/N)  
ILMI (Y/N)  
ILMI Address Registration (Y/N)  
ELAN Name (if applicable)  
PNNI or IISP (if applicable)  
Internal or External Reachable Address  
C-4  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Worksheets  
Port Configuration Worksheet  
ELAN  
Configurations  
ELAN Name  
LECS Address  
LES Address  
# of Clients  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
C-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PVC Configuration Worksheet  
Worksheets  
PVC Configuration Worksheet  
Profile  
Configurations  
Profile Name  
Traffic Type  
PCR  
SCR  
MBS  
Shaper  
Configurations  
Port  
Shaper Number (1-8) Traffic Type  
PCR  
SCR  
MBS  
C-6  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Worksheets  
PVC Configuration Worksheet  
PVC  
Configurations  
Bi or  
Uni  
Direc-  
tional  
Early  
UPC  
Profile  
Name  
Packet  
Discard  
(Y/N)  
Mode  
(Y/N) -  
(1-5)  
Input  
Port  
Input  
VPI  
Input  
VCI  
Output  
Port  
Output  
VPI  
Output  
VCI  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
C-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PVC Configuration Worksheet  
Worksheets  
This page is for your notes.  
C-8  
Centillion 1200N ATM Switch User Manual  
NTP 297-8103-903  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

National Instruments Network Card NI 9853 User Manual
New Transducers CRT Television 42PF9830 10 User Manual
Nilfisk ALTO Vacuum Cleaner 692003 User Manual
One for All Universal Remote Little Easy User Manual
Optimus Cassette Player SCP 87 User Manual
OTC Wireless Network Card WiSER2400IP User Manual
Palsonic TV DVD Combo TFTV4839PWDT User Manual
Panasonic Computer Drive CF VDD283 User Manual
Panasonic Digital Camera AK HC1800N User Manual
Panasonic Switch ASCT1F46E User Manual